2013 RAM Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual

2013 RAM Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual
2013 RAM TRUCK 1500/2500/3500
Chrysler Group LLC
13D241-126-AF
Sixth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
RAM TRUCK
1500/2500/3500
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau- For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
tions.
www.dodgebodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body support. For service issues, contact your authorized
modifications or special equipment installed by van dealer.
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac- the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
turer.
INTRODUCTION 7
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor- VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Remote Unlock The Doors . . . . . . .
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock .
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .21
. . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . .24
. . . . . . . .26
. . . . . . . .27
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The
Vehicle) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .29
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Power Windows – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .58
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .59
▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .60
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .71
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .118
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition System
Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with either an Ignition
Node Module (IGNM) which operates similar to a standard ignition switch, or a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
which allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Fob into the
ignition switch with either side up.
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
with either side up.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
NOTE: For further information, refer to Starting Procedures in ”STARTING AND OPERATING”.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
Emergency Key Removal (WIN)
Emergency Key Removal Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Fob
(KIN)
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission). Turn the Key Fob to the OFF
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this
condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob or
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key
for locking and unlocking the doors.
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
SENTRY KEY®
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob. system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
NOTE:
or unlocked.
• ⬙Keyed⬙ Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
when the driver door is open.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
• “Keyless⬙ Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
when the driver door is open.
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
• If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
(EVIC) the EVIC will display “Key In Ignition”.
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
CAUTION!
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatbulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid problems and loss of security protection.
Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible signals, for the first three minutes the
horn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes
only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the
alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.
To Disarm The System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence,
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security doors and the exterior lights will blink three times. Check
Light flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the the vehicle for tampering.
condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a prosystem will ignore that condition and monitor the regrammed Sentry Key® is inserted into the ignition
maining doors and ignition.
Rearming Of The System
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
switch. To exit the alarming mode, press the RKE trans- ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
mitter UNLOCK button, or insert a programmed Sentry The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Key® into the ignition switch.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your doors or open any door.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previoutside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furVehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
ther information.
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb
wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far right
detent position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock all doors,
tailgate, and the RamBox® (if equipped) as well as
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 33 ft (10 m) using a hand-held radio transmitter
with integrated key. The transmitter does not need to be
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Press and
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock
horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if equipped).
the far left detent position).
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
(WIN)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Fob (KIN)
Remote Unlock The Doors
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door (If EVIC is • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all
doors), or press the unlock button twice within five
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no
longer than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customering the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Undermitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
the key removed.
information.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
its previous setting.
following procedure:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no
Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the
longer than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the
Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the
LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate
the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
the key removed.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to proceed as follows:
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerNOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Underter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
information.
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
following procedure:
To Lock The Doors
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transPress and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than ten
ter to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn
holding the LOCK button.
will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
Using The Panic Alarm
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
its previous setting.
(8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle NOTE:
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle • The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
and horn will remain on.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Cancelling Remote Lowering Vehicle lowering can be
cancelled at anytime. When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the vehicle will raise up to the next defined
level and lock out the remote lowering feature until the
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be
lowered by pressing the Key Fob air suspen- ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.
sion lowering button two times. When Remote To cancel vehicle lowering, press the Key Fob air suspenkey FOB lowering is requested, the vehicle will sion lowering button one time during the lowering
send a series of chirps and flashes to alert the customer process. When vehicle lowering is cancelled the horn will
that the operation has begun and will continue these chirp two times and the hazard lights will flash four
alerts until it successfully lowers.
times. Once raising is completed, the horn will chirp one
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to time.
RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The
Vehicle) — If Equipped
lower remotely:
NOTE: For further information, refer to “Air Suspension
System in ”STARTING AND OPERATING”.
The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park) ride
height.
Programming Additional Transmitters
The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
All doors must be closed.
The ignition key must be out of the vehicle.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
following conditions:
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
• This device must accept any interference received,
housing or the printed circuit board.
including interference that may cause undesired opWith the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
eration.
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
during removal.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it distance, check for these two conditions:
with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE:
•
•
1.
2.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of • Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station How To Use Remote Start
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB All of the following conditions must be met before the
radios.
engine will remote start:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Hood closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • HAZARD switch off
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Battery at an acceptable charge level
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaWARNING!
turely:
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters • Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
could cause serious injury or death.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
onds. The parking lights will flash vehicle
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
will run for 15 minutes.
third cycle.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will automatically lock the doors.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Remote Start mode.
Start request.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
cycle, press and release the START/STOP button.
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
NOTE:
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
• The message “Push Start Button” will display in the Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
EVIC until you push the START button.
Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
• “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you press the start button. Refer DOOR LOCKS
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for
Manual Door Locks
further information.
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Door Lock Knob
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
2
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Auto Unlock Doors Programming — If Equipped
The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The Panel” for further information.
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accorauthorized dealer per written request of the customer.
dance with local laws.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Auto Unlock Doors — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all
doors closed).
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
opened by using the outside door handle even if the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
Child Lock Control
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. For further information,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “STARTING AND
OPERATING”. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the
RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
NOTE:
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® settings” in “Understanding Your Instru• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
ment Panel” for further information.
door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll down
the window and open the door with the outside door • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
handle.
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the theft
alarm.
• The vehicles theft alarm can be armed/disarmed by
pressing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons
(if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
door is unlocked.
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
is in the OFF position.
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
door is unlocked.
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outPress” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Transmitter In Vehicle
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
doors.
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows – If Equipped
The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of the Crew Cab models. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front
door is opened.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door
Only) — If Equipped
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Reset Auto-Up
the first detent and release when you want the window to Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
stop.
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
pectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the
after the window is fully open.
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window LOCKOUT Switch (4–Door Models Only)
The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window control on the front
passenger and rear passenger doors. To disable the
window controls on the front passenger and rear passenger doors, press the window LOCK button into the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
latched or down position. To enable the window controls, ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
press the window LOCK button again and return the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurswitch to the released or up position.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Front seat belts may incorporate pretensioners that
may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front Please pay close attention to the information in this
passenger
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
possible.
— if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
wheel
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
CHildren (LATCH).
• All seat belt systems (except driver’s, front center and
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
second row center position) include Automatic Lockinflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
ing Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webrates of inflation based on several factors, including the
bing into position by extending the belt all the way out
severity and type of collision.
and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to
restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat —
if equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
(Refer to “Child Restraints”).
buckled up in a rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltvehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
between you and the door.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab®, Mega Cab®
and Crew Cab front center seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is
designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using
a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in a vehicle,
take it to your authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the air bag deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage
areas behind the front seats. The black latch plate can
be detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle
located on the inboard side of the passenger seat.
Insert the seat belt tongue into the center red slot on
the black buckle. The black buckle latch plate can be
removed when the seat belt tongue is pressed into the
buckle. Allow the retractor to take up the extra webbing, and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab
back exit bezel, thus freeing up all the area behind the
front seats.
2
Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until
there is an audible “click”. For proper seat belt usage,
refer “Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions”.
In Use Position
Inserting Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
• If the black latch and black buckle are not properly
connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black buckle,
ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the
webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and black buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the black latch
and black buckle.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
away from your neck. Press the button located on the you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
position that fits you best.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab®, Mega
Cab® and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To
fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click”. To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the
latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end
of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips.
Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt as
tightly as is comfortable.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
For Quad Cab®, Mega Cab® and Crew Cab Only
First Row
Second Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
Cinch
Cinch
Passenger
ALR
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
For Standard Cab Only
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
Driver
Center
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
First Row
N/A
ALR
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
Second
Row
N/A
N/A
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- • N/A — Not Applicable
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of • ALR — Automatic Locking Retactor
feature for each seating position.
Passenger
ALR
N/A
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
the entire belt is extracted.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode – If
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Equipped
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prenow in the Automatic Locking Mode.
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
the shoulder belt.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
locking mode.
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
worn snugly and positioned properly.
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authospeed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
deactivating BeltAlert®.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exthroughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
tender and store it.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Side Air Bags they are located in the outboard side of the
inflation based on several factors, including the severity front seats.
and type of collision.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
but they will open during air bag deployment.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
Advanced Front Air Bags.
authorized dealer immediately.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental • Steering Wheel and Column
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. If the • Instrument Panel
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped).
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
equipped
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) used for more severe collisions.
— if equipped
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
— If Equipped
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the
outboard side of the front seats.
2
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags may provide front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners (if
equipped) and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both
sides of the vehicle may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors (if equipped)
that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
Knee Impact Bolsters
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
bags — if equipped, SAB air bags — if equipped, and
driver and front passengers, and position front occupants
front seat belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required,
for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air
depending on several factors, including the severity and
Bags.
type of impact.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, rollover, or side collisions.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all away from an inflating air bag.
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collithe air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Adtics also record the nature of the malfunction.
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
especially applies to children.
Inflator Units — If Equipped
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will Front And Side Impact Sensors
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes events.
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and Enhanced Accident Response System
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you the communication network remains intact, and the
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag event the ORC will determine whether to have the
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followcurtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when ing functions:
it is inflated.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
until the ignition key is turned off.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
• Unlock the doors automatically.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
operator:
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
• indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call;
9-1-1 Call Operating Instructions – If Equipped
• the vehicle brand; and
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button
on the Rearview Mirror;
• the last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call 4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
additional help is needed.
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
Phone Screen . Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operagreen LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
tor may be able to open a voice connection with the
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made;
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1
operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on
the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of
the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light
is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service
the ORC system immediately.
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
red;
beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or
• The Phone Screen will display the following message stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your are not limited to, the following factors:
dealer.”; and,
• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
and the delayed accessories mode is active;
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The ignition key is in OFF position;
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact;
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
damaged during a crash;
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash;
General Information
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
are unavailable or obstructed;
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility;
this device must accept any interference received, includ• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator;
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Wireless network congestion;
If A Deployment Occurs
• Weather; and
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC - if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of
the vehicle.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
bags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Air Bag Warning Light
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
eight-second interval.
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of are recorded. However, other parties, such as law entime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Child Restraints
These data can help provide a better understanding of
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States, and every Canadian province, requires
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints — Quad Cab®/Crew Cab
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints — Standard Cab, Mega Cab®
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
2
Standard Cab
Quad Cab®/Crew Cab Full Bench
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Quad Cab®/Mega Cab®/Crew Cab Split Bench
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Quad Cab®/Crew Cab
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor
to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Mega Cab®/Standard Cab
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
alone instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Quad
Cab®/Mega Cab®/Crew Cab
2
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Quad Cab®/Mega Cab®/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats
Driver Side
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, Regular Cab models have tether
strap anchorages behind the front center and
right seats. Quad Cab®, Mega Cab® and Crew
Cab models have tether strap anchorages located behind each of the rear seats.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Standard Cab/Quad
Cab®/Crew Cab Full Bench
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating position.
WARNING!
Mega Cab® Tether Strap Mounting (Behind Covers)
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuanchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a restraint systems will be installed as described here.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Seat LATCH — Quad Cab®/Mega
Cab®/Crew Cab Split Bench
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
Improper installation of a child restraint to the be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed. retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description unInstalling Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
Belt
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of types of seat belts.
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle
2
Quad Cab®/Mega Cab®/Crew Cab
Standard Cab
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Quad Cab®/Crew Cab
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight
limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Mega Cab®/Standard Cab
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Yes
The Tether Anchor can be used with the seat
belt until the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
the seat belt without the Tether Anchor once
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction.
path.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
in any direction.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
Regular and Mega Cab® Trucks: In the regular cab
truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind the
center and right passenger seats. In the mega cab truck,
the top tether anchorages are located behind each rear
seating position. There is a plastic cover over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
under the head restraint and to the tether anchor
directly behind the seat.
2
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust
the head restraint to the upward position to pass the
tether strap underneath the head restraint and between its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the
tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Mega Cab® Tether Strap Mounting
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING! (Continued)
younger, including a child in a rearward facing infant
seat.
2
Quad Cab® or Crew Cab Trucks: The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located
between the rear glass and the back of the rear seat.
There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating
position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether
strap of the child restraint.
Right or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear
seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the center tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind
the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the
center seat.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
both child seats should be connected to the center tether
strap loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard
child seats.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind
seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either
the right or left outboard seat.
Center Seat:
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised
Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
2
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the Installing Three Child Restraints:
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat.
Route the tether straps following the directions for
right and left seating positions, above.
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but
do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the
tether strap following the directions for the center
seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
left tether straps before the center tether strap.
Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
2
120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
122 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defroster
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Information
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
The light should come on and remain on for
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
124 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid
(2500,3500,4500,5500 Models Only), or brake fluid leaks
are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .131
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . .137
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . .139
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . .140
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .142
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .143 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .161
▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped. . . . . . . .147
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . .148
▫ Mega Cab® Rear Seat Features . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .155
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .177
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 䡵 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . .
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .172
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .175
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .179
. . . . .180
. . . . .181
. . . . .182
. . . . .182
. . . . .182
. . . . .182
. . . . .183
. . . . .184
. . . . .184
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .193
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .187 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .195
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .189
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .196
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .200
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .204
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .207
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .212
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Front Seat Cupholders — (40–20–40 Seats) . . . .213
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab®. . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Glove Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . .218
▫ Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Storage (Regular Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Storage and Seats (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . .224
▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED . . .225
䡵 PICKUP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
䡵 RAMBOX® — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ RamBox® Integrated Box Side Storage Bins . . .230
▫ Locking And Unlocking RamBox® . . . . . . . . .232
▫ RamBox® Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Bed Extender — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Bed Rail Tie-Down System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 SLIDE-IN CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 EASY-OFF TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Disconnecting the Rear Camera or Remote
Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Removing The Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Locking Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
䡵 TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER-IF EQUIPPED . . .247
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover — If Equipped . . . . . .247
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation And
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
3
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
3
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear a video
display illuminates to display the image generated by the
rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto
dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view
viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
Folding Mirror
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, press
the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,
a potential extra button push is required to get the
mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
area which can cause excessive drag.
3
Power Folding Mirror Switch
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
Power Mirror Controls Location
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- To adjust a mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right)
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
tons and a four-way mirror control switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
Power Mirror Movement
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. Equipped
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addithe mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on auto- tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
matically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or
out).
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
Trailer Towing Position
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to SEATS
entering an automated car wash.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror vehicle.
and can be adjusted separately.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Blindspot Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power
driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two
power seat switches that are used to control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
3
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas- will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the switch when the desired position is reached.
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
the seats independently. The controls for each seat are
located near the bottom center of the instrument panel
(below the climate controls) or in the radio unit.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGHlevel heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating.
Press the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements OFF. This is the
same procedure for the soft-keys in the
radio.
NOTE:
There are two heated seat switches as well as soft-keys in • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
the radio that allow the driver and passenger to operate
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to Rear Heated Seats
operate.
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
LOW to OFF automatically, based on time and tempera- seats are located on the rear of the center console.
ture of the seat. The heated seats can operate on HIGH There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
heat for a maximum of 20 minutes before switching to passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
LOW heat at that time, the number of illuminated LEDs choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber
changes from two to one, indicating the change. Once a indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
seat has switched to the LOW heat setting it may operate use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one
for a maximum of 40 minutes before automatically for LOW and none for OFF.
shutting OFF. The heated seats can shut OFF early or may
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
not turn on when the seat is already warm.
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on NOTE:
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just
operate.
below the climate controls as well as soft-keys located in
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
the radio screen. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
and LOW.
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
Press the switch once to choose HIGH,
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
press it a second time to choose LOW.
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
Pressing the switch a third time will
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
turn the ventilated seat OFF. When
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
HIGH speed is selected both lights on
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
the switch will be illuminated. When
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
LOW speed is selected one light will
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
be illuminated.
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion is a small fan that
seats to operate.
draws air from the passenger compartment and pulls the
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher On models equipped with remote start, the drivers
ambient temperatures.
ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or backward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
forward and hit you causing injury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback
and actuate the handle, then position the seatback
in the desired position.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard
seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat.
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to On some models the back of the center portion (20%)
swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind compartment.
the seat.
Dump Feature — Manual Recline Seat Only
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mega Cab® Rear Seat Features
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach
the desired position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — If Equipped
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold down either rear seatback:
3
1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.
Table Mode
3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.
Table Mode Handle
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward
when the seatback is folded flat.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
• Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop or collision and strike
someone in the vehicle, causing serious injury or
death.
To fold either rear seat flat:
1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either
of the rear seats.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
Handle
2. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.
Rear Passenger Fold-Flat Seats
3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury or death. Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback in not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear Front Head Restraints
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Adjustment Button
Rear Head Restraints
Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re- • The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad
straints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Vehicle” for further information.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali- The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of side of the drivers seat cushion.
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station
presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
can also be programmed to recall the same positions
when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Memory Seat Buttons
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transProgramming The Memory Feature
mitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
memory position 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals [if
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferswitch.
ences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals and radio
station presets).
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
switch.
memory position has been set.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
NOTE:
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
memory position has been set.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
• The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory
1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch
feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle
to the ON/RUN position.
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followFeatures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” ing:
for further information.
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Enter-N-Go).
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one 2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instrucNOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you tions on how to set a memory profile.
must select the “Remote Linked to Memory” feature
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
(EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “UnderProfile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE • To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
transmitter within 10 seconds.
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and press- Driver Two Memory Position Recall
ing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
transmitter in Step 4.
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on
the memory switch.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory • To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
Driver One Memory Position Recall
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s mirror and
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on before another recall can be selected.
the memory switch.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it,
before raising the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
Safety Latch Location (1500 Series Shown)
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Headlight Switch Location
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog Headlights
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
switch clockwise to the headlight position.
cleaning procedures must be followed.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instruTo minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To ment panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)
position.
lowed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
Automatic Headlight Position
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the
DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
Headlight Delay
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle speTo aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
NOTE:
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight • SmartBeam™ can be turned on or off using the
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced, the To Deactivate
SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
performance. See your local authorized dealer.
SmartBeam™ system.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforderstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
mation.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
AUTO (A) position.
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch 3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
(A) to the on position.
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further information.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Fog Light Switch
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
high beam is selected.
Lights-On Reminder
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when Interior Lights
the driver’s door is opened.
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far
right detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 transmitter. When a door is open and the interior lights
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out.
lights will automatically turn off.
This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled the doors to stay open for extended periods of time
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the
ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer
control right (brighter) or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the
odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by
rotating the control to the right until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Dimmer Control
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing on
the corresponding lens.
3
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light
Cargo Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- button.
ity of the floor console area.
Cargo Light Switch
Ambient Light
The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately 30
seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is
pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
3
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Turn Signal Lever
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS
AND WASHERS
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will Windshield Wipers
turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select
the desired wiper speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Windshield Washers
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position. If the washer knob is
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will
WARNING! (Continued)
operate for several seconds after the washer knob is
released. It will then resume the intermittent interval the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while windshield with the defroster before and during
in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle windshield washer use.
approximately three times after the wash knob is reMist Feature
leased.
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
time and automatically shut off.
containers.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
WARNING!
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield spray the windshield with washer fluid.
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
windshield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
to activate this feature.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandtive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper sensitivity. Setting 5 can be used if the driver
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
following conditions:
OFF position when not using the system.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
NOTE:
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed TILT STEERING COLUMN
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem- This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the steering column, below the multifunction lever.
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU- Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
place.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
WARNING! (Continued)
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
Tilt Steering Lever
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
(Continued)
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
bank below the climate controls. There are also soft-keys Vehicle” for further information.
in the radio screen that will activate the heated steering
wheel.
WARNING!
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
3
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
NOTE:
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
the best possible seat/pedal position.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(50 km/h).
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Switches
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle To Vary The Speed Setting
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inand release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
operate at the selected speed.
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed increase until the button is released, then the new set
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
To Deactivate
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System ParkSense® Sensors
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
recommendations.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
changed to the ON/RUN position.
direction, depending on the location, type and orientaParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
tion of the obstacle.
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
ParkSense® Warning Display
ParkSense® Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or from the Uconnect Touch®
System (if available). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” or ⬙Uconnect Touch® Settings”
(if available) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fast, to continuous.
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arc
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-45 in
45-31 in
(200-115 cm)
(115-80 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
4th Solid
3rd
Solid
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
31-18 in
(80-45 cm)
Fast
Less than
18 in (45 cm)
Continuous
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pressed to dis- Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
able the system, the instrument cluster will System
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
When the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
NOTE: The ParkSense® system will automatically disfaulted condition, the EVIC will display the
able when the system detects that a trailer with trailer
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake
Module. The EVIC will display “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
QUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in RENOTE:
VERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not oper• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
ate.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operIf ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
ating properly.
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the underside of • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the igni• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
tion. If the message continues to appear, see an authowill display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙. Furthermore, once
rized dealer.
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
appears in the EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for as
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
radio when it is sounding a tone.
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
CAUTION!
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide • ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
fascia/bumper.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
close proximity.
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
object as a sensor problem, causing the ⬙PARKSENSE
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message to be
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
displayed in the instrument cluster.
using ParkSense®.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift
lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the rearview mirror — if equipped or Uconnect®
screen — if equipped along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView®
camera is located to the left of the tailgate handle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited.
Active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path
based on the steering wheel position. The active guide
lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zones
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
3. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN
1. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
2. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
3. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds The overhead console is located on the headliner above
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, the review mirror. The overhead console contains the
following features:
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
• Courtesy/Reading Lights
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® 5.0
• Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
1. Press the “Settings” button.
• Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped
2. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.
• Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing on
the corresponding lens.
3
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
HomeLink® Buttons
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The Electronic
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display “CLEARrity Alarm is active.
ING CHANNELS”. Release the buttons when the EVIC
displays “CHANNELS CLEARED”.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
program.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINbutton you want to program and the hand-held transING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
mitter button.
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
NOTE:
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). The EVIC will display “CHANfor the channel to train.
NEL # TRANSMIT”. If the garage door opener/device
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
activates, programming is complete.
Step 2.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
erase the channels.
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
follow these steps:
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANthe EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
release the button.
NOTE:
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining • It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
steps.
for the channel to train.
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If
the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigrepeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transerase the channels.
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until door or gate motor.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
not release the button.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all
program.
remaining steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
button while you press and release (“cycle”), your programming, plug it back in at this time.
hand-held transmitter every two seconds.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN- follow these steps:
NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
for the channel to train.
release the button.
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from 3. Without releasing the button proceed with
Step 2.
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If Using HomeLink®
the device is plugged in and activates, programming is
To operate, press and release the programmed
complete.
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- Troubleshooting Tips
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may here are some of the most common solutions:
also be used at any time.
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitSecurity
ter.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
in your vehicle.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
To erase the channels press and hold the two outside • Did you unplug the device for programming and
HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
remember to plug it back in?
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
“CLEARING CHANNELS”. Release the buttons when If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the EVIC displays “CHANNELS CLEARED”.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
3
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switch
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Press and hold close switch to fully close sunroof.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
the glass panel.
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
Ignition Off Operation
have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol.
Information Center (EVIC)
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is
position. Opening either front door will cancel this connected to the battery, and can provide power at all
feature.
times.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to and element must be used.
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
locations:
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack when
equipped with a bench seat
3
Power Outlets — Center Stack
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Center console when equipped with bucket seats.
Power Outlet — Upper Lid
• Rear of the center console storage compartment —
Quad Cab® or Crew Cab.
• Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
— if equipped.
Power Outlet — Center Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
WARNING!
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply
power when the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC positions.
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Optional Floor Shifter
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders — (40–20–40 Seats)
Power Inverter Outlet
The cupholders are located on the backside of the center
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center
The outlet automatically turns off when the device is section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.
unplugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Mounted Shifter
Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab®
Quad Cab® vehicles may be equipped with a rear
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats there are two cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passencupholders located in the floor console.
ger convenience.
3
Cupholders
Rear Cup Wells
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab
STORAGE
Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders Glove Box Storage
located in the center armrest.
The glove box is located on the passenger side of the
instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle
release. The glove box door will automatically open.
3
Glove Box
1 — Upper Glove Box
2 — Lower Glove Box
Upper Glove Box
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the lower glove box, pull on the handle to release Door Storage
the latch and lower the door.
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Lower Glove Box
Front Door Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Rear Door Storage — Crew Cab
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and The center storage compartment is located between the
passenger door trim panels.
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.
Rear Door Storage
Center Storage Compartment
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision. Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight
of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
These items could be thrown about endangering
occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not
exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
Upper Storage Compartment
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to
power outlet that can be used to power small electrical open the lower storage bin.
devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Lower Storage Bin
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second the latch and open the lid.
row seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to
bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for fully open the lid.
cleaning.
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
Opened Storage Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Seatback Storage
Storage (Regular Cab)
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
the length of the cab.
3
Drivers Side Seatback Storage
Storage Bin
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage compartment.
CAUTION!
Always lift the storage compartment lids by using
the handle. Failure to lift the lids by using the handle
can result in damage to the lids.
To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
the rear seat.
Crew Cab Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
Grocery Bag Hooks
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located
on the overhead console.
Rear Window Switch
Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
Unfolding the Load Floor
A locking device in the center of the window helps to 1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
3
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Quad Cab® and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat
may be equipped with a folding load floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
Unfolding The Load Floor
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under
the load floor unfolds into position.
the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Load Floor In Open Position
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for utility
and convenience.
3
Load Floor Securing Straps
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
Pick Up Box Features
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must
use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available
from your authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber
across the box in the indentations provided above the
wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the
floor.
WARNING!
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds
may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough
roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo
that may result in vehicle damage. If wide building
materials are to be frequently carried, the installation of a support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the pickup
box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, supports must be installed to transfer the weight of the
load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may
result. The use of proper supports will permit
loading up to the rated payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side
to side to create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
RamBox® Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) for 1500
series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of vehicles of evenly distributed cargo.
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs
(450 kg) total.
RAMBOX® — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox® system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of three features:
• Integrated box side storage bins
• Cargo extender/divider
• Bed rail tie-down system
RamBox® Cargo Storage Bins
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg)
1500 series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and
3500 series vehicles per bin.
To open a storage bin with the RamBox® unlocked, press
and release the button located on the lid. The RamBox®
lid will open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to
RamBox® Pushbutton And Lock
fully open.
The interior of the RamBox® will automatically illumiNOTE: RamBox® will not open when the pushbutton is nate when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch
pressed if the RamBox® is locked.
located at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch
once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again
will turn the lights back on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
CAUTION! (Continued)
it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addition to other RamBox® accessories) are available from
MOPAR®.
RamBox® Light Switch
Locking And Unlocking RamBox®
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid
is required to stay open for extended periods of time,
(Continued)
Press and release the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the RamBox® (if equipped). Refer to “Remote Keyless Entry” for further details.The RamBox® storage bins
can be locked using the vehicle key. To lock and unlock
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the storage bin, insert the key into the keyhole on the RamBox® Safety Warning
pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock or counterclock- Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
wise to unlock. Always return the key to the upright injury or damage to your vehicle:
(vertical) position before removing the key from the
pushbutton.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox® bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to
vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential for
damage, secure all cargo to prevent movement and
protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp
objects with appropriate padding.
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha- attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
nism.
Bed Extender — If Equipped
RamBox® Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
Lever — If Equipped
The bed extender has three functional positions:
• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To install the bed extender into the storage position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully 3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard
forward in the bed against the front panel.
ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down
loops.
3
Storage Position
Cargo Tie Down Loop
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side Divider Position
gates in the closed position.
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.
To install the bed extender into a divider position perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure
the panel into place and assist against theft.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the
sides of the bed.
3
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends
are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side Extender Position
gates in the closed position.
The extender position allows you to load the bed of the
truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an
additional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
additional cargo room is needed. The extender position
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both
sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place
and assist against theft.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the
center handle vertically in order to release the extender side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and
handle.
Extender Position
To install the bed extender into the extender position
perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
Extender Installation
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure
into place.
Locking Tab
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property
damage:
• Cargo must be secured.
• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.
• Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.
• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg) load on the tailgate.
• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in
stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.
• When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Bed Rail Tie-Down System
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat
should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
3
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed
that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
detent and tighten the nut.
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
Utility Rail End Cap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
Camper Applications
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed.
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load- RKE the electrical connector must be disconnected prior
ing” document available from your authorized dealer. to removing the tailgate.
For safety reasons, follow all instructions in this important document.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) must be provided.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Disconnecting the Rear Camera or Remote
Keyless Entry — If Equipped
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pressing inward in the locking tab.
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or RKE
connector bracket located on the rear sill.
Locking Tab
Connector Bracket
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the Removing The Tailgate
glove box) to the chassis wiring harness and insert the
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and
bracket back into the sill.
or power locks (if equipped), refer to “Disconnecting
the Rear Camera — If Equipped” in this section.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove box)
to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
terminals do not corrode.
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will presupport cables.
vent damaging the connector and bracket when storing or reinstalling the tailgate.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
Locking Tang
3. Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking
the truck with the key-fob if equipped with remote
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
keyless entry.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER-IF EQUIPPED
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover — If Equipped
To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau 1. Lower the tailgate.
Cover which consists of different features:
2. Pull down on the clamp on both driver and passenger
• Easy Tri-Fold cover
sides.
• Tonneau fore aft locator
• Crosscar inside bed locator
3. Pick up on the cover and fold it back into the second
panel.
• Front and rear clamps
4. Be sure both clamps are pushed completely down.
• Stowage strap
5. Pick up on the cover and fold it back into the third
panel.
• Locking Capability
NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured
at the front of the box without removing completely.
6. Once in the third panel position pull down on the
clamp on both sides.
7. Be sure to clip both straps together to insure the cover
stays together.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. With two people remove the cover.
Semi Clamped Position
Clamped Position
NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3
Released Position
Stowage Strap
NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely before removing.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation And Cleaning
Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and
push the Cover forward against the front of the truck
bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on the
vehicle. Disengage the stowage straps and unfold the
Tonneau Cover then attach the rear clamps to the truck
bed flange to secure the Tonneau Cover to the vehicle.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the
clamped position by placing a lock through the locking
hole.
Locking Hole
NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau Cover is secured before
driving after installation.
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover use MOPAR®
Whitewall &Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPAR® Leather &
Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ EVIC White Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .256
▫ EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .257
▫ EVIC Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .271
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .292
䡵 Uconnect® ACCESS SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .309
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .310
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .311
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .312
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without Touch-Screen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touch-Screen — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Automatic Climate Controls With Touch-Screen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Window Fogging and Frosting . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1 — Headlight Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster
3 — Radio
4 — Hazard Switch
5 — Upper Glove Compartment
6 — Lower Glove Compartment
7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Lower Switch Bank (Engine Start/Stop, ESC
OFF, TOW/HAUL, Electronic Trailer Brake, Air
Suspension, Park Assist) — If Equipped
10 — Instrument Panel Drawer
11 — Climate Controls
12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
13 — Gear Selector/Transfer Case Position Switch
14 — Ignition Switch
15 — Hood Release
16 — Parking Brake Release
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
1. Tachometer
not functioning and that service is required. However,
The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions the conventional brake system will continue to operate
Per Minute (RPM x 1000).
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high RPM for extended periods. Engine
operation over 3200 RPM (Redline) can result in
significant damage that will not be covered under
warranty.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which
monitors the emissions and engine control sysThis light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
tem.
If
the
vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
will
come
on when the ignition is first turned on and
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
remain
on,
as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will
2. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain
on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come
on during starting, have the condition investigated
promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either cycling operation is controlled by the engine control
indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a module. Post-heat operation can run for several minutes,
rapid rate.
and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will
stabilize.
5. Voltmeter
NOTE:
6. Brake Warning Light
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates
the electrical system voltage. The pointer should
This light monitors various brake functions,
stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If
including brake fluid level and parking brake
the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
application. If the brake light turns on it may
remains there during normal driving, the electrical sysindicate that the parking brake is applied, that
tem should be serviced.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesBrake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake sary.
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
WARNING!
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
dropped below a specified level.
system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condiON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for aptions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
the brake fluid level checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
inspected by an authorized dealer.
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
tion.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
7. High Beam Indicator
Vehicle” for further information.
This light shows that the high beam headlights are 9. Air Bag Warning Light
on. Push the multifunction control lever away
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights or
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light will
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
remain illuminated and a chime will sound.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” 13. Cargo Light — If Equipped
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo
further information.
light is activated by pressing the cargo light
10. Oil Pressure Gauge — If Equipped
button on the headlight switch.
The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running. A continuous high or
low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
11. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).
12. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
14. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
15. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
16. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS 17. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
to continue to function properly.
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
NOTE: The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a “Low
Tire” message in the odometer (Base Cluster), or in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) screen indicating “Low Tire” for EVIC enabled clusters.
18. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
19. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
NOTE: The highest available transmission gear is dis- 22. TOW/HAUL
played in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle
The TOW HAUL button is located on the center
Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic
stack upper switch bank. This light will illumiRange Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector
nate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic
Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further 23. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
information.
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Menu
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
NOTE:
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
24. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
WARNING!
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling
System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
4
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful • Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect®
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
Access 5.0 & 8.4 radio)
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
The system allows the driver to select information by
• Digital Speedometer
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Stop/Start Info (If Equipped)
• Trailer Tow
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
EVIC Steering Wheels Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
• UP Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
• SELECT/RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the SELECT/RIGHT arrow
button to access/select the information screens
or sub-menu screens of a main menu item.
Press and hold the SELECT/RIGHT arrow
button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
• LEFT Arrow Button
scroll downward through the main menu and
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the
Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
main menu from an info screen or sub-menu
item.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and
white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Information — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG, Trailer Trip
(distance only), Trailer Brake Gain)
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
6. Selectable Menu Icons
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
7. Air Suspension Status – If Equipped
cluster and consists of eight sections:
8. 4WD Status
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
9. Selectable Gauge 2
10. Selectable Gauge 1
the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure”.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Unstored Messages
• Five Second Stored Messages
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An message temporarily, press and release the MENU butexample of this message type is “Automatic High Beams ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the folOn”.
lowing procedure.
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Oil Change Required
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
upon your personal driving style.
OFF/LOCK position.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
not start the engine.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times •
within 10 seconds.
•
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
•
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
•
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
•
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due
Fuel Low
Service Antilock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Service Airbag System
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Traction Control Off
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Washer Fluid Low
• Parking Brake Engaged
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Brake Fluid Low
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Battery Voltage Low
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Lights On
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Turn Signal On
• Service Airbag System
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Key in Ignition
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
• Door Open
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Doors Open
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Gear Not Available
• Washer Fluid Low
• Shift Not Allowed
• Service Air Suspension System
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Service Transmission
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Service Shifter
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Stop/Start Not Ready Fuel Level Low – If Equipped
• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
• Stop/Start Not Ready Steep Incline – If Equipped
• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
• Stop/Start Not Ready Extreme Outside Temperature –
If Equipped
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking And
Tire Change
• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too High –
If Equipped
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too Low –
• Stop/Start Ready – If Equipped
If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled – If
• Stop/Start Not Ready Hood Open – If Equipped
Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging – If Equipped • Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Door Open – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Trailer Tow/Haul Selected – If • Stop/Start Not Ready Cabin Cooling Or Heating – If
Equipped
Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready 4WD/Low Range Selected – If • Stop/Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling Or
Equipped
Heating – If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• Stop/Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating Se- • Stop/Start To Restart Shift Out Of Park – If Equipped
lected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Off – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected – If
• Autostop Duration – If Equipped
Equipped
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
• Stop/Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned – If
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
Equipped
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Stop/Start Autostop Active – If Equipped
EVIC Amber Telltales
• Stop/Start To Restart Press Clutch Or Shift To Neutral This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell– If Equipped
tales. These telltales include:
• Stop/Start Req’d Fault Detected – If Equipped
• Low Fuel Telltale
• Stop/Start Cannot Autostart Hood Open – If
Equipped
• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Battery – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Stop/Start System – If
Equipped
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windmaximum payload may have been exceeded or
shield washer fluid is low.
load leveling cannot be achieved at its current
ride height.
• Low Coolant Level Indicator
Protection Mode will automatically be selected in order
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle to “protect” the air suspension system, air suspension
adjustment is limited due to payload.
coolant level is low.
• Service Stop/Start System Telltale - If Equipped
• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Stop/Start is Unavailable, service Stop/Start
system.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
EVIC White Telltales
• Electronic Speed Control Ready
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
This light will turn on when the electronic
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
speed control is ON. For further information,
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underfour minutes when this light turns on.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
EVIC Green Telltales
This light warns of an overheated engine condi- • Electronic Speed Control SET
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apThis telltale will illuminate green when the
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
electronic speed control is SET. For further
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Conoverheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous Vehicle.”
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to EVIC.
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Digital Speedometer
Air Suspension – If Equipped
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button Only
until the Digital display icon is highlighted in the
Oil Temp
EVIC. Press and release the SELECT/RIGHT
arrow button to change the display Oil Life
between km/h and mph.
Multimeter
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Tire Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the SELECT/RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Press the LEFT or SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to
scroll through the following information sub-menus:
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button and one of the
following will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the • Distance
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
• Average Fuel Economy
color than the other tire pressure value.
• Average Speed
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
• Elapsed Time
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be Hold the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to reset all the
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return information.
to the main menu.
Trip B
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Press and release the Left or Right arrow butTrip A
ton until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the
EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
Trip B). The Trip B information will display the
following:
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or • Distance
Trip B). (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
• Average Fuel Economy
Trip B) The Trip A information will display the following:
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Average Speed
Stop/Start – If Equipped
• Elapsed Time
Hold the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to reset all the
information.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Stop/Start icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the SELECT/
RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/Start
status.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Trailer Tow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is
highlighted.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trailer Tow icon is highlighted.
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG BarPress the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button and
graph)
the next screen will display the following
• Range To Empty (RTE)
trailer trip information:
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Audio
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to display the
active source.
Screen Setup
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to enter the
Screen Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Stored Messages
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the EVIC. If there is
more than one message, pressing the SELECT/RIGHT
button will display a stored warning message. Press and
release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than
one message to step through the remaining stored messages. If there are no message, pressing the SELECT/
RIGHT button will do nothing.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
For vehicles equipped a 3.5” EVIC screen
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the UP and DOWN button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to Language
display one of the following choices.
When in this display you may select one of six languages
For vehicles equipped with a 7” EVIC screen and not for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the UP or
equipped with a Uconnect® Access 8.4 radio.
DOWN button while in this display and scroll through
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
the language choices. Press the SELECT button to select
features when the transmission is in PARK.
English, Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian,
Use the UP or DOWN button until Personal Settings German, Dutch. Then, as you continue, the information
displays in the EVIC.
will display in the selected language.
Press and release the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to Units
Enter Vehicle Settings
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
following choices.
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
NOTE: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the
the following settings.
SELECT button the selected setting will be displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
been selected. Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sysWhen this feature is selected, the navigation system
tem function and operating information.
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina- Tilt Mirror In Reverse
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placed
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
in reverse gear, the side mirrors tilt downward to allow
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle. To
deactivated.
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
Park Assist System — If Equipped
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Nav–Turn By Turn – If Equipped
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only
or Sound and Display. To make your selection, scroll up
or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
Auto Wipers — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
check-mark is removed showing the system has been then press and release the SELECT button until a checkdeactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Illuminated Approach
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
Headlamps With Wipers
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
showing the system has been deactivated.
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights Auto Lock Doors
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Auto Unlock Doors
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature showing the system has been activated, or the and release the SELECT button until a check-mark apcheck-mark is removed showing the system has been pears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
deactivated.
system has been deactivated.
Horn with Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will Remote Unlock Sequence
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Key Fob Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the seat mounted switch. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the remote start is activated.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock showing the system has been deactivated.
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and Key-Off Power Delay
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
When this feature is selected, the power window
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Tire/Jack Mode – If Equipped
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
disabled to assist with changing a spare tire. To make
Air Suspension Display Alerts – If Equipped
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
When All is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
displayed. When Warnings Only is selected only the Air system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
Suspension Warnings will be displayed. To make your showing the system has been deactivated.
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
Transport Mode – If Equipped
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. To make your
that the setting has been selected.
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a
Aero Ride Height Mode (1500 Only) – If Equipped
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
When this feature is selected the Ride Height will auto- system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed. To showing the system has been deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
information.
Trailer Select
Horn with Remote Lower – If Equipped
Wheel Alignment Mode – If Equipped
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can be
selected between “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3” and
“Trailer 4”. To make your selection, scroll up or down
until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
Lights with Remote Lower – If Equipped
Trailer Brake Type
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTE
LOWER button is pressed. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lower feature selected.
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can
be changed between “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”,
“Light EOH” and “Heavy EOH”. To make your selection,
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
setting has been selected. Refer to “Integrated Trailer Odometer
Brake Module” in “Starting And Operating.”
• 000
Trailer Name
• 000.0
When this feature is selected, the Trailer name can be
selected from 16 names. To make your selection, scroll up Upper Left
or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
• None
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has • Compass
been selected.
• Outside Temp (default setting)
Calibrate Compass
• Trans Temp
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
• Oil Temp
Compass Variance
• Time
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average MPG
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
• Current MPG
• Average MPG
• Trip A
• Current MPG
• Trip B
• Trip A
• Trailer Trip (distance only)
• Trip B
• Trailer Brake Gain
• Trailer Trip (distance only)
Upper Right
• Trailer Brake Gain
• None
Lower Left
• Compass (default setting)
• None (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Compass
• Trans Temp
• Outside Temp
• Oil Temp
• Trans Temp
• Time
• Oil Temp
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Time
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Range
• Current MPG
• AVG MPG
• Trailer Brake Gain
• Current MPG
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Right
• None (default setting)
• Cancel
• Okay
• Compass
Uconnect® ACCESS SETTINGS
• Outside Temp
The Uconnect® Access system uses a combination of soft
and hard keys located on the center of the instrument
panel that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
• Trans Temp
• Oil Temp
• Time
Hard-Keys
• Range
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® Access
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
• AVG MPG
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
Access 8.4 Settings
Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect® Access system allows you to access programYour Uconnect® Access system may also have a Screen mable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Off and Back hard-keys located below the system.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SiriAccess screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second
usXM Setup.
time to turn the screen on.
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
option on the Uconnect® Access system.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Access dis- release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
play.
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete either press the Back
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
Soft-Keys
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
previous menu or press the X soft-key to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys
on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up
or down through the available settings.
Display
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
will be available.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
• Display Mode
soft-key.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
• Set Language
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the When in this display, you may select one of three
arrow back soft-key.
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
When in this display, you may select the brightness with language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• Units
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
to return to the previous menu.
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
• Voice Response Length
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
When in this display, you may change the Voice ReCluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key • Fuel Saver Display In Cluster
to return to the previous menu.
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
close out of the settings screen.
Clock
• Set Time Minutes
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
will be available.
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
• Sync Time With GPS
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When in this display, you may automatically have the to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch close out of the settings screen.
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Time Format
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the When in this display, you may select the time format
previous menu.
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
• Set Time Hours
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the folprevious position when the transmission is shifted out of
lowing settings will be available.
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
• Park Assist
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE- back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph • ParkView® Backup Camera
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only
or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status, Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
touch and release Sound Only or Sounds and Display Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
“ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper- displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
ating information.
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
Safety / Assistance
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
to return to the previous menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• Four Corner Air Suspension Modes — If Equipped
There are four air suspension modes designed to protect
the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode
is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed
towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment, refer to your authorized
dealer for information. Protection Mode will automati• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
cally be selected in order to “protect” the air suspension
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system when the payload has been exceeded or load
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control leveling cannot be achieved.
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
Lights
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
will be available.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Headlights With Lock
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature • Sound Horn With Lock
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head- When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkTouch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
menu.
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
Doors & Locks
the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following • Sound Horn With Remote Start
settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
• Auto Unlock On Exit
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-NFob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st • Memory To FOB — If Equipped
Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
driver door first is selected, once the driver door is to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the following settings will be available.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
soft-key the following settings will be available.
Engine Off Options
• Horn With Remote Start
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Compass Settings – If Equipped
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
Compass Variance Map
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
• Equalizer
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • Paired Devices
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
directly on the desired setting.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
• Speed Adjusted Volume
to the Uconnect® Access User’s Manual.
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Air Suspension – If Equipped
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the Suspension soft-key the following
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
settings will be available.
back soft-key.
• Sound Horn with Remote Lower
• Surround Sound
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER butTo make your selection, touch the Surround Sound ton is pressed. Touch the box next to your selection and
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
back soft-key.
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated..
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the following settings will be available.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Lights with Remote Lower
appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
system has been deactivated.
signals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTE
LOWER button is pressed twice. This feature may be • Tire Jack Mode
selected with or without the sound horn on lower feature When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
selected. Touch the box next to your selection and a disabled to assist with changing a spare tire. Touch the
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the box next to your selection and a check-mark appears next
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed to the feature showing the system has been activated or
showing the system has been deactivated.
the check-mark is removed showing the system has been
• Suspension Display Messages
deactivated.
When All is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be • Transport Mode
displayed. When Warnings Only is selected only the Air When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. Touch the box
next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to
• Automatic Aero Mode
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
When this feature is selected the Ride Height will autocheck-mark is removed showing the system has been
matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed.
deactivated.
Touch the box next to your selection and a check-mark
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
• Wheel Alignment Mode
• Subscription Information
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
information.
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
SiriusXM Setup
the Subscription Information screen in order to reAfter pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following subscribe.
settings will be available.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub• Channel Skip
scription Information screen.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
access the switches.
Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature
allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Access
User’s Manual.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a The button located in the center of the left hand control
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the programmed in the radio pre-set pushbuttons.
switch will decrease the volume.
CD Player
The button located in the center of the right hand control Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
source.
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left hand after the current track begins to play.
control is different depending on which mode you are in. If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
The following describes the left hand control operation in second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Radio Operation
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next precautions:
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
surface.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
CLIMATE CONTROLS
too high.
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
instrument panel below the radio.
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Manual Climate Controls Without Touch-Screen
— If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
4
1 – Front Blower
2 – Temperature Control
3 – MODE Control
4 – RECIRCULATION Control
5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 – DEFROST Mode
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the warmer temperatures.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position. NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in
any conditions other than full cold or full hot), between
the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The
warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives
improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side winAir is directed through the outlets in the instrudow demist outlets.
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
Mix Mode
airflow.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the Recirculation Control
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
Defrost Mode
vehicle. A LED will illuminate when you are in
Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation
Air is directed through the windshield and side
mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke,
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
start-up in very hot or humid weather.
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE:
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C • If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
modes only when necessary.
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temmode will cause windows to fog on the inside because perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum Floor modes.
defogging, select the outside air position.
Stop/Start System – If Equipped
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb- While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
ing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
button.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
Air Outlets
engine running condition.
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can Air Conditioning Operation
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
airflow.
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuNOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
minate when the A/C system is
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
engaged.
seat passengers.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MAX A/C
Manual Climate Controls With Touch-Screen — If
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the Equipped
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is Hard-Keys
recirculated.
The hard-keys are located below the radio touch-screen.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed.
Climate Controls — Hard-keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the radio touch-screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And
Soft-keys)
1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
2. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
3. Front Defrost Button
Temperature Controls — Soft-keys
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
4. Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
5. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demister outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings
are as follows:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conHard-key
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
warmer air from the floor outlets.
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
7. Climate Control OFF Button
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control
ON/OFF.
knob when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and
8. Temperature Control Down Button
allow outside air into the vehicle.
Push the button for cooler temperature settings. On the
touch-screen, slide the temperature bar towards the blue NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
arrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings.
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
9. Temperature Control Up Button
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled autoPush the button for warmer temperature settings. On the matically if these modes are selected.
touch-screen, slide the temperature bar towards the blue
arrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Automatic Climate Controls With Touch-Screen
— If Equipped
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the radio touch-screen.
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys located below the radio touch-screen.
4
Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Controls — Soft-keys
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
Soft-keys)
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
1. A/C Button
4. Defrost
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
2. Recirculation Button
turns off after 10 minutes.
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
CAUTION!
3. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
5. Modes
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort condemister outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
are as follows:
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:
Hard-key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
7. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
8. Driver Temperature Controls
Push the Up button for warmer temperature settings.
Push the Down button for cooler temperature settings.
On the touch-screen, slide the temperature bar towards
the red arrow soft-key for warmer temperature settings
or slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow
soft-key for cooler temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
9. Passenger Temperature Controls
11. SYNC
Push the Up button for warmer temperature settings.
Push the Down button for cooler temperature settings.
On the touch-screen, slide the temperature bar towards
the red arrow soft-key for warmer temperature settings
or slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow
soft-key for cooler temperature settings.
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. AUTO Temperature Control
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Operation
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Controls — Soft-keys
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric hard key a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® Access System SetNOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
tings” in this section of the manual.
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled autoon low until the engine warms up. The blower will matically if these modes are selected.
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Summer Operation
Recirculation Control
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
you may wish to recirculate interior air by glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
recirculation LED will illuminate on the soft and hard
keys when either button is selected. Push either soft or
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
Window Fogging and Frosting
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
Vacation/Storage
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
is clear of ice, slush and snow.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Outside Air Intake
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Operating Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTO
STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . .348
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Start Stop System . .349
▫ To Manually Turn On The Start Stop System . .350
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .351
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .352
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .346
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .354
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Six–Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped —
1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Six–Speed Automatic Transmission (5.7L Engine)
— 2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case –
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position
Switch) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position
Switch) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position
Switch) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .406
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
䡵 AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM (2500 MODELS ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
䡵 STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
䡵 SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
䡵 WINCH USAGE (POWER WAGON ONLY) — IF
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Things To Know Before Using Your Winch. . . .442
▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Understanding The Features Of Your Winch. . .444
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Winch Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Operating Your Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
– IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only . . . . . . . .467
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .467
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped . .468
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped . . . .469
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped. . . . . . . .469
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped . . . .478
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .490
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .493
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .494
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Directional Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Dual Rear Wheels – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
䡵 SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .505
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Tire Light
Load Inflation Switch Description (2500 Models) –
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ 3.6L And 4.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 TIRE CHAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .503
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .520
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .557
䡵 SNOWPLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ 1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ 2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than 15second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
(Continued)
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™
(if equipped) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key fob to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key fob to the OFF position, wait five
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission Normal Starting
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
pressed to shift out of PARK.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run but will automatically disen- 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
gage when the engine is running.
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
of a button, as long as the Remote engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ FOBIK is accelerator pedal.
in the passenger compartment.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle NEUTRAL Position)
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in and START. To change the ignition switch positions
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the follow these steps.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In 1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
Park” message and the engine will remain running. 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
could roll.
displays “ACC”),
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “RUN”),
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to save fuel and
reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not are met. Releasing the brake pedal will automatically
have enough power to continue running when the key re-start the vehicle.
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release Automatic Mode
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
running smoothly.
customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15- NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other
conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO
be repeated.
STOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automatiOccur:
cally adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer
settings will be maintained upon return to an engine
1. The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
running condition.
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTO
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Electronic STOP
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understand- Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
2. The vehicle must be completely stopped.
In following situations the engine will not stop:
3. The transmission Gear Selector must be in Drive and • Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
the brake pedal depressed.
• Driver’s door is not closed
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
• Outside temperature is less than 1°F (–17°C) or greater
the zero position and the stop/start telltale will illumithan 104°F (40°C)
nate indicating you are in an Autostop. While in an
• The vehicle is on a steep grade
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
speed
While in DRIVE the engine will start when the brake
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The
transmission will automatically reengage upon engine
• Battery discharged
restart. During this transition the brakes will hold the
vehicle to avoid undesired vehicle movement.
• The transmission is not in DRIVE
• Hood is open
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode
Conditions that will cause the engine to start automatically while in Autostop mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
Other factors which can inhibit AutoStop include: fuel
level, accelerator pedal input, engine temp too high and • The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
steering angle.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several • To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC settings
times without the STOP/START system going into a • HVAC is set to full defrost mode
STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi• Autostop time exceeds 5 minutes
tions of the items listed above.
• Battery voltage drops too low
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
• Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake pedal • The engine hood has been opened
applications
• A STOP/START system error occurs
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed
The engine may then be restarted by moving the transmission shift selector out of PARK (e.g. to DRIVE) or, in
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode
some cases, only by a KEY START. The Electronic Vehicle
• The emissions system requires it
Information Center (EVIC) will display a SHIFT OUT OF
PARK message, or a STOP/START KEY START RE• A STOP/START system error occurs
QUIRED message, to indicate which action is required.
Conditions that force an automatic shift to PARK while
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in Autostop mode:
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
The Engine Will Not Start Automatically and the Trans- information.
mission will be placed in PARK if:
• The driver door is open and brake pedal released
• The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is
unbuckled
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
To Manually Turn Off The Start Stop System
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. If the STOP/START system is manually turned off, the
engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the
ignition switch.
5. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the key is turned off and
back on.
STOP/START OFF Switch
To Manually Turn On The Start Stop System
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank).
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
2. The light on the switch will turn off.
1500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
assembly. It is located between the front grill and the
system will not shut down the engine. A SERVICE
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.
STOP/START SYSTEM message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec- 2500/3500 Models
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “UnderThe engine block heater cord is routed through the grille
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
by the right front tow hook.
The system will need to be checked by your authorized
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
dealer.
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the winter months. During winter months,
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
the c-clip.
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
System Malfunction
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission shifter is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission shifter.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (if equipped) in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission shifter to be in
PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the OFF position, and the
shifter is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is
in the OFF position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission
shifter in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running
and the brake pedal must be pressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed simply rotate the shifter control to the appropriate detent.
to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission — If
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
Equipped
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
efficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shifter
hundred miles (kilometers).
control is located on the instrument panel. The transmission gear (PRND) is displayed both above the shifter Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
control and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
(EVIC). To select a gear range, simply rotate the shifter Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
control. You must press the brake pedal to shift the shifting between these gears.
transmission out of PARK (see Brake/Transmission Shift The transmission shifter control has only PARK, REInterlock System). You must also press the brake pedal to VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE, when the shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. To shift past (ERS) switches (described later in this section). Pressing
multiple gear ranges at once (such as Park to Drive), the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering wheel)
while in the DRIVE position will select the highest
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
available transmission gear, and will display that gear in NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
the instrument cluster as 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precauGear Ranges
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Electronic Transmission Shifter
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
start the engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
(Continued)
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
(ERS) Operation⬙ in this section) to select a lower gear
range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
DRIVE
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
This range should be used for most city and highway
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission Transmission Limp Home Mode
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The Transmission function is monitored electronically for
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
tics under all normal operating conditions.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) switches (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
operation.
indicate what actions may be necessary.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomIn the event of a momentary problem, the transmission mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
following steps:
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en- If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired service is required.
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation – 8 Speed
Transmission
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) switches allow the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the
transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you shift the
transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will not
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
shift above third gear (except to prevent engine overspeed), but will shift down into second and first gears
normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shifter control is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEARswitch (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,
display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
maintain that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS
mode, tapping the GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change
the top available gear.
1 — ERS (-) Switch
2 — ERS (+) Switch
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the GEAR+
switch until “D” is once again displayed in the transmission gear position indicator in the instrument cluster.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
TOW/HAUL Switch
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
The
“TOW/HAUL
Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
to excessive shifting.
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
is started.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
shifting between these gears.
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The shift
lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
column (if equipped) or on the console (if equipped). You NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downmust press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys- (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
tem” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from Operation” in this section). Pressing the ERS (-/+)
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the shift switches (column shift) or moving the shift lever to the
lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, left or right (-/+) (console shift) while in the DRIVE
position will select the highest available transmission
or when shifting out of PARK (column shift only).
gear, and will display that gear in the instrument cluster
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
Six–Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped
— 1500 Models Only
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
WARNING!
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
PARK
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle moveThis range supplements the parking brake by locking the
ment and possible injury or damage.
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
move the shift lever clockwise without first pulling
vehicle in this range.
it toward you (column shift), or rearward with the
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
brake pedal released (console shift), after you have
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Gear Ranges
(Continued)
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™
(if equipped) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted
shift lever toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted
shifter, move the shift lever all the way forward and to
the left until it stops.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and
fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
range will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
To access all six available gears, you must use the of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
below.
differently until the transmission cools down.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range
Select (ERS) Operation)” in this section) to select a lower
gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is seexcess heat generation.
lected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
be modified depending on engine and transmission
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature imdriven to an authorized dealer for service without damproves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
aging the transmission.
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). following steps:
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
1. Stop the vehicle.
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
5. Restart the engine.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gears normally.
operation.
Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an
additional underdrive gear which is not normally used
during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear
can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability
when towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode,
gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the
service is required.
normal fourth and fifth gears.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
Six-Speed Transmission
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the position, the transmission will operate automatically,
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift switch (column shift) or tapping the shift lever to the left
(-) (console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
gear as the top available gear. For example, if you are in
DRIVE and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the
shift lever/switch one time in the (-) direction, the
display will show 4 (ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap
down (-) will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 (the
added underdrive gear). Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS
(-) or (+) will change the top available gear.
Column Shift Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
Console Shift Lever
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
the right (+) (console shift) or press the ERS (+) switch
(column shift) until “D” is once again displayed in the
shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-)
switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift
to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the
mission will automatically downshift (for engine brakfollowing conditions are present:
ing) during steady braking maneuvers.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
Overdrive Operation
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate
temperature,
• the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate temperature,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/
TOW/HAUL Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the NOTE:
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving].
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
Because top gear is disabled, and the engine speed is
is started.
higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting
Torque Converter Clutch
properly when cold. This is normal. Using the ElecA feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
tronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatithat the transmission is able to shift into and out of
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
Overdrive.
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during • If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con- vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
engine.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
shifting between these gears.
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The shift
lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column. The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downout of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter- shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Operation” in this section). Pressing the ERS (-/+)
Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into RE- switches (on the shift lever) while in the DRIVE position
will select the highest available transmission gear, and
VERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK.
will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4,
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
3, 2, 1.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
Six–Speed Automatic Transmission (5.7L Engine)
— 2500/3500 Models Only
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
WARNING!
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
PARK
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle moveThis range supplements the parking brake by locking the
ment and possible injury or damage.
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
move the shift lever clockwise without first pulling
vehicle in this range.
it toward you after you have placed it in PARK.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
leaving the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
(Continued)
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Gear Ranges
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (if equipped) in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the shift lever toward
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
stops.
• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
This range should be used for most city and highway
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downtorque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv- of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions. Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
Select (ERS) Operation” in this section) to select a lower significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
range will improve performance and extend transmission gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
excess heat generation.
DRIVE
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 5. Restart the engine.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)
switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS (-) or (+)
will change the top available gear.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
5
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
Column Shift Lever
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the ERS (+) Overdrive Operation
switch until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever The automatic transmission includes an electronically
position indicator in the instrument cluster.
controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the
WARNING!
following conditions are present:
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate
temperature,
• the engine coolant has reached an adequate
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
temperature,
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
ERS (-) switch down. The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down. • the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
TOW/HAUL Switch
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
sixth gear is disabled, and engine speed is higher when
the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly
when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control, when the transmission is
sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted
transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further information.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If Equipped
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the The transfer case provides four mode positions.
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans• Two-wheel drive high range (2H)
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into • Four-wheel drive high range (4H)
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
• Neutral (N)
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
• Four-wheel drive low range (4L)
the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L
position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
positions.
position for normal street and highway conditions such
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
as dry, hard surfaced roads.
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveengine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
moving the shift lever to the desired positions. The 4H on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry, can cause damage to the drivetrain.
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
damage to the driveline components.
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear drive- place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
shafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, For additional information on the appropriate use of each
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping transfer case mode position, see the information below:
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
2H
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera4H
tures.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Four-Wheel Drive High Range - This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N
Neutral - This range disengages the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range locks the front disengage faster if you momentarily release the acceleraand rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction force when shifting the transfer case lever.
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road 2H Or 4H To 4L
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
CAUTION!
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware dam- transfer case NEUTRAL.
age can result.
NOTE:
4L
• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
2H To 4H
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
• Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
Transfer Case Switch (Four-Position)
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
mode positions:
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal Operating” for further information.
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomselect a different transfer case position, the indicator
plished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired
lights will do the following:
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for
specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
The selected position indicator light will flash until the the control knob back to the current position, wait five
transfer case completes the shift.
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
case, located in this section.
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
The indicator light for the current position will remain after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
ON.
means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.
The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1.
2.
3.
If
1.
2.
WARNING!
3. The transfer case will not shift.
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING! (Continued)
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD LOW
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
2WD
speed four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear
driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
4WD LOCK
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front N
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the
selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time,
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
the shift.
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
Alternate Procedure
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
into NEUTRAL.
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
either of the following procedures:
position.
Preferred Procedure
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light
is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) – If Equipped
5
Transfer Case Switch (Five–Position)
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five
mode positions:
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
• Four-wheel drive automatic range (4WD AUTO)
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or fourwheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than
the 2WD mode.
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD,
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
selection. When you select a different transfer case posi- the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
tion, the indicator lights will do the following:
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the case, located in this section.
transfer case completes the shift.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
means that the four-wheel drive system is not functionIf One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
ing properly and that service is required.
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
WARNING!
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
3. The transfer case will not shift.
(Continued)
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD LOW
transfer case mode position, see the information below: Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
2WD
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
4WD AUTO
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Four-Wheel Drive Auto Range - This range sends power N
to the rear wheels. The four–wheel drive system will be
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions. driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
4WD LOCK
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further inforFour-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front mation.
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five
mode positions:
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by • Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
• Four-wheel drive automatic range (4WD AUTO)
located on the instrument panel.
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or fourwheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
Transfer Case Switch (Five–Position)
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by depressing the recessed button (with a ballpoint pen
or similar object) located in the center of the 4WD Control
Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be
used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
mation.
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD,
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for spe- 4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument
cific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road selection. When you select a different transfer case posisurfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW tion, the indicator lights will do the following:
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo- If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
nents.
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than
the 2WD mode.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, For additional information on the appropriate use of each
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping transfer case mode position, see the information below:
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
(Continued)
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto Range - This range sends power
to the rear wheels. The four–wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further inforFour-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front
mation.
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction Shifting Procedure
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
NOTE:
4WD LOW
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshift. The position indicator light for the previous
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
position will remain ON and the newly selected posiat the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
requirements for the selected position have been met.
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
N
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
4WD LOCK
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light 2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
ON.
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
Press the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch to
shift the transfer case. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD
AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the
control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
switch must be in the ON position with the engine either
running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
ignition switch is in the ACC position.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, press the desired position on the
transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate Procedure
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
or if they no longer are being met while the shift
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission
attempt is in process, the desired position indicator
into NEUTRAL.
light will flash continuously while the original position
3. Press the desired position on the transfer case control
indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been
switch.
met.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not • The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Description
The air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of being able to
adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.
1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp
(Customer selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode
when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20
seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph
(106 km/h).
Air Suspension Switch
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
use only where maximum ground clearance is re• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1 in (26 mm) – This position should be the primary
quired. To enter OR2, press the “Up” button twice
from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
position for all off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2)
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While
is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will
in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
result. To enter OR1, press the “Up” button once from
the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below
the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be available due to vehicle
35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the
payload, an EVIC message will be displayed when this
vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle
for further information.
will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1
may not be available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC
• If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting,
message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to
be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
clearance required for certain areas and vehicle dam“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
age may occur.
information.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
(15 mm) – 1500 Models Only – This position provides
2 in (51 mm) – This position is intended for off-roading
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the
vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h)
and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or
if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The
vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the
vehicle speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and
35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE: Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle
settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or in the Uconnect™ Access 8.4 Radio (If
Equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
or “Uconnect™ Access Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 2
in (51 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier
passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of
the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo.
To enter Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Down” button
once from the NHR while the vehicle speed is below
33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below
15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60
seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To
return to Normal Height Mode, press the “Up” button
once while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over
15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be
available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC message
will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to ⬙Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding
Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
NOTE: Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your
key fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to “A Word About
Your Keys” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your
surroundings, you may not have the clearance required for certain areas and vehicle damage may
occur.
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN
position or the engine running for all user requested
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the
vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed
until the open door(s) is closed.
vehicle will move up first and then the front. When
lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and
then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure
a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling
to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect™ Access
keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into on- Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
coming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the further information.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your
authorized dealer for service.
Air Suspension Modes
• Transport Mode
• To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle into
Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load
leveling system. This mode is intended to be used
with engine running. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect • Wheel Alignment Mode
the system in unique situations:
• Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
• Tire/Jack Mode
must be enabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your In• To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspenstrument Panel” for further information.
sion system has a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled. This mode is intended to be • Protection Mode
used with engine running. Refer to “Electronic Ve• In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
vehicle will enter Protection Mode when load levelYour Instrument Panel” for further information.
ing cannot be achieved. Some driving may be required to clear the protection mode telltale in the
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- Operation
ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show
Panel” for further information.
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
lamps will show a position which the system is working
NOTE:
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
• If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/ flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the posidisabling of air suspension features must be done tion the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect® Access Set- multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indicatings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
further information.
Pressing the “UP” button once will move the suspension
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
one position higher from the current position, assuming
Display Messages
all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position,
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The “UP”
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle button can be pressed multiple times, each press will
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed
Instrument Panel” for further information.
based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Pressing the “DOWN” button once will move the sus- • Normal Ride Height (NRH)/Aero Mode – Indicator
pension one position lower from the current level, aslamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is
suming all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN
in this position.
position, engine running, doors closed, speed below
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illumithreshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can be pressed
nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/
multiple times, each press will lower the requested level
Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h).
by one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Mode
If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
or the lowest position allowed based on current condi(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicator
tions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
lamp 3 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumiand EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the
changes and user requested changes.
vehicle.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5, and 6 will
• Tire/Jack Mode – indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3,4 and 5 will be
vehicle.
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
• Wheel Alignment Mode – indicator lamps 3 and 4 will
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM (2500 MODELS ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front
and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only
be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with
the ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle
with the differentials locked on pavement due to the
reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.
CAUTION!
• Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced
and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the
axles are locked on hard surfaced roads.
• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can damage
drivetrain components. Lock the rear axle before
attempting situations or navigating terrain, which
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.
The switch has three positions, AXLE UNLOCK, REAR
LOCK, and FRONT/REAR LOCK. Under normal driving conditions, the switch should be left in the AXLE
UNLOCK position. In the AXLE UNLOCK position, the
front and rear axles are unlocked. In the REAR LOCK
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
position, the rear axle is locked. In the FRONT/REAR NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be
LOCK position, the front and rear axles are locked.
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator
light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR
NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the veposition, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still
hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking
provides torque biasing capability for moderate low
action.
traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
solid.
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for off-road
driving only. Locking the front axle during on-road
driving will reduce the steering ability. This could
cause a collision and you may be seriously injured.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to
“Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Move the axle locker switch
position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
(5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front
rear axle is locked.
axle is locked.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front axle STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
will lock.
WAGON ONLY
To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front
suspension travel in off-road situations.
will go out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to
side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while
turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right
hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance
may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the
axles.
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm)
in the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major
advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect
it has on approach/departure and break over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway
To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to bar switch located on the instrument panel.
AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go
out when the rear axle is unlocked.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
remain in the On-Road mode during normal driving
conditions.
WARNING!
1 — On Road
2 — Off Road
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h), you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury or death. The front
stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintaining control of the vehicle. The
system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to
reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph
(29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing off road
light and solid on road light. Once vehicle speed is
reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will
attempt to return to the Off-Road mode.
The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road.
The system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated
by a solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI
or 4LO as shown in “Four Wheel Drive Operation” and
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
press the right hand Off Road stabilizer/sway bar button
to obtain the Off-Road position. The amber indicator
light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been
fully disconnected.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
mode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss
of control of the vehicle, which could result in
serious injury or death. Contact your local service
center for assistance.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY
to side.
To return to the On-Road mode; press the left hand On Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics
Road stabilizer/sway bar button .
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.
These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore
those wilderness trails where few travel, providing a
source of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you
venture out, you should contact your local governmental
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
agency to determine the designated off-road vehicle
(ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should always tread
lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV
recreational areas. The National Forest Service, Bureau of
Land Management or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of information and usually have
maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components
of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and
steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped
with boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in
severe off-road situations that would be considered impassable by a normal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you
can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree
ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the
vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle
has an RTI of 655, which means you can articulate one
front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three
wheels remain in contact with the ground.
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to
cross a body of still water, where the powertrain and
drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has
high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross
a pool of water, without stopping, 24 inches deep at a
maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of
water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3
degrees.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches. Water may intrude
into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving offroad. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
When To Use Low Range
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
When driving off-road, shift into 4L (Low Range) for vehicle’s momentum.
additional traction or to improve handling and control on
slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low • Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a
range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power
low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low Range)
range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and
if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary
down hills, with improved control and less effort. Also,
to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can
use 4L (Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get
spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to
heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4H
slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
(High Range) traction will not do the job.
than a ¼ turn quickly back and forth, while still
applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh
⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
• Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get through.
You should use 4L (Low Range) with a gear low
enough to maintain your momentum without shifting.
If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a ¼ turn quickly back and forth
for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are
normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting
stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are
any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with
full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a
trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not
stop. The key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding
abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft
sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a
minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically
improve your traction and handling, while driving on
the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal
air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back
up prior to reducing the pressure.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This
will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of
the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high centered.
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
Getting High Centered
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a
hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is
too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill
side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on
top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches
or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover
the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, then change transmission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4L
(Low) and proceed with caution. You should use first
gear and 4L (Low Range) for very steep hills.
• Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your
ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and
apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not race
forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of grade
could cause you to lose control. If the front end begins
to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four
tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of
the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over
the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the steering wheel no more than
a ¼ turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a
fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not
make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in
severe injury or death.
descent and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not
allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe
descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
• Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of
vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places
distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the
more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases
vehicle descends too fast? If you feel confident in your
the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make
ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L (Low
sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
Range) with the transmission in first gear (manually
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle
select first gear on automatic transmissions) and proheading slightly up or down.
ceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING!
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover , which may result in severe injury.
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or
down.
• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall
or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,
allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine and transmission to
help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to
control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
Driving Through Water
locking or skidding the tires.
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only
be attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
CAUTION!
your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You want vehicle components and your brakes will be less
to use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and proceed very effective once wet and/or muddy.
slowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h]
maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; • Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you
approach any type of water you need to determine if
do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle
out and walk through the water or probe it with a
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids
stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
for signs of water ingestion.
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or
muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross.
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or
muddy waters. These water types normally contain
hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.
If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than
proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
• Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running
stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving
water can easily push your vehicle downstream
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water,
a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths greater
than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
downstream out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition
and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle
heading slightly upstream using the low and slow
technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or
form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and
vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like
rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will
need to experiment to determine what is right for your
situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to
replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remember you must return the tires to normal air pressure
before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure
you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road
air pressure.
CAUTION!
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
CAUTION! (Continued)
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at
a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Vehicle Recovery
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
recovery should always be given consideration before
attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go
off-road driving without the ability to recover your
vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with
you usually works best for most situations. The first
thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?
Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go
forward or to go backward? Can you still move the
vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you
alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there
high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process?
Answering these questions will help you determine the
best method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle
slightly and the only issue is slick ground, then rock
cycling your vehicle would be the first choice. If you have
ample room, an additional vehicle and there is low risk of
vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a
tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and
easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation
where great care needs to be taken during the recovery,
then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If you are
severely hung up on something you should jack the
vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to
allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing
further damage. This should be tried before attempting
any recovery method.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first
clearing the object, may result in additional underbody damage.
shift. If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free,
stop and try another method of recovery. Continuous
rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to
your vehicle and the environment.
CAUTION!
• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
used methods. This simply involves shifting your excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster
vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying than an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
throttle after each shift. During this process, for addi• Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow straps
tional traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly
are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from
back and forth no more than a ¼ turn. If you are stuck
minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which
in mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during
is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are
this process to clean the debris from the tread and
designed to take the abusive force generated during
improve the traction. You want to create a rocking
vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other
motion with the vehicle. This helps build vehicle
vehicle component as an attachment point. Using tow
momentum, which hopefully gets you out. Remember
straps requires coordination between the two drivers.
to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the
Good communication and line of sight are required for
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
brakes, once signaled by the other driver. This sea safe recovery. First connect the tow strap to the
correct attachment points on both vehicles. There
quence is important to avoid having the recovered
vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the vehicles to
allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join two tow
straps together using a 1 ½ inch hard wood dowel.
WARNING!
This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is
safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
have the tow vehicle backup, leaving two to three feet straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects
worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using could become projectiles if a strap breaks, which
light throttle, should accelerate tightening the strap could cause severe injury. Never leave more than two
providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle. or three feet of slack in the strap. More slack than this
The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recov- greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damery, at the time of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires age. Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from
in the same direction as the pulling vehicle. After the a strapping or winching situation.
vehicle becomes free, the driver of the previously stuck
• Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Addivehicle should signal they are free and should hit their
tional Information) – Winching is most commonly
brakes stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pullused in the following situations: there is no support
ing vehicle should let off the throttle without using the
vehicle available, a high controlled force is required to
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
recover the vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to
work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a
great deal of control. It allows you to walk the vehicle
out of the situation in a slow controlled manner. This
control works well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Once you decide it is time to use the winch look
for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong enough
to hold more than the vehicle’s weight and provide a
direction of pull as straight as possible. Use block and
tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or
increase the winch’s pulling force. If the anchor point
is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable
to the strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that
vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot
find an anchor point within reach try using your spare
tire by burying it. Once you have determined an
anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring there are a
least five wraps of cable left on the drum, and place a
floor mat or something else over the strung out cable.
Placing something over the strung out cable helps
keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place
the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle
as you power the winch in. Be careful not to allow
slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try
to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to bunch up
on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and
always stand back while winching.
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over
or straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload
the winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle
while winching. Failure to follow these instructions
can result in serious or fatal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
propeller shafts.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
your vehicle ready when you need it.
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
and cleaned as soon as possible.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
After Driving Off-Road
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
there is a difference between the traction characteristics
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during turn.
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Traction
Acceleration
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warning before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
your vehicle ready when you need it.
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill, • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
exhaust system for damage.
cautiously.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
required.
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
nally across the hill.
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and susWhen driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
values specified in the Service Manual.
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
After Driving Off-Road
propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or WINCH USAGE (POWER WAGON ONLY) — IF
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake EQUIPPED
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
and cleaned as soon as possible.
General Winch Information
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds
wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very
high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate
the winch without reading and understanding the complete winch owner’s manual.
Tensioning The Wire Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on
the winch drum.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re- drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out
for 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
quired to tension the wire rope.
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the recover before continuing to winch.
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
Winch Motor Thermal Protection
neatly wound onto the drum.
Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device
in the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive
CAUTION!
duration, the device may interrupt motor function to
Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the
protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor
winch.
to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The
winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.
CAUTION!
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch
5
Winch Components
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle 6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum
charging system and features a thermal protection
to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the
wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
switch that automatically stops motor function in the
power-in direction if the motor gets too hot.
7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote
interface between the winch operator and the winch.
The remote control provides the ability to power the
control to be attached to the control pack to allow the
winch to function.
winch in, out, and stop the winch. To operate the
winch, the toggle switch is pressed down to power the
3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
winch in and up to power the winch out. The winch
allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and
will stop if the switch is left in the neutral (center)
transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is
position.
equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation
of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.
CAUTION!
4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set:Provides balance between
speed and pulling power.
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be
Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope
connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
and minimizes damage to the rope.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Winch Accessories
The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
winching.
Gloves: Wire rope, through
use, will develop ⬙barbs⬙
which can slice skin. It is extremely important to wear
protective gloves while operating the winch or handling
the wire rope. Avoid loose fitting clothes or anything that
could become entangled in
the wire rope and other moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used
properly, the multi-purpose
snatch block allows you to (1)
increase the winch’s pulling
power; and (2) change your
pulling direction without
damaging the wire rope.
Proper use of the snatch block
is covered in ⬙Before You
Pull.⬙
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clevis/D-Shackles:
The
D-Shackle is a safe means of
connecting the looped ends of
cables, straps and snatch
blocks. The shackle’s pin is
threaded to allow easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of tough, highquality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point
for the winch rope to a wide
variety of anchor points and
objects, as well as protect living trees.
Operating Your Winch
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
• Never use as a hoist.
• Never use to move persons.
• Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.
• Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the wire rope.
• Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or
under load.
• Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under
load, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope drum is
moving.
• Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep
others away during winching.
• Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire
rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation
and when spooling.
• Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use
a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk
protector on the anchor.
• Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
• Never use ⴖbungeeⴖ straps that develop tremendous
and potentially dangerous amounts of force when
stretched.
• Always disconnect the remote control when not in
use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never winch when there are less than five wraps of
wire rope around the winch drum.
• Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, then using remote
inside a vehicle.
• Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
points to remember when using your winch are:
1. Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
2. Always take your time when using a winch.
3. Use the right equipment for the situation.
4. Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire
rope to slip through your hands when handling the
rope.
5. Only the operator should handle the wire rope and
remote control.
6. Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
CAUTION!
• Always Know Your Winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch and
the winching operation.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always inspect winch installation and wire rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced
immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation
must be corrected immediately.
• Always be sure any element which can interfere
with safe winching operations is removed prior to
initiating winching.
• Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
wire rope and rigging.
• Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
• Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for
proper snugness.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear or damage.
5
2. Put on gloves.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the
winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to
disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.
Hook Strap
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire
rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a
certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become
Free Spool
twisted and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free
wire rope damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the
the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook
hook strap while you work.
strap to the hook (if not attached).
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
5
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established
your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
choker-chain around the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand the load.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor
is critical to winching operations. An anchor must be
strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors
include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as
possible. If no natural anchors are available when recovering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor
point. In this case, be sure to put the transmission in
NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and block its wheels to
prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want
an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the
direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope
to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An
Clevis/D-Shackles
anchor point as far away as possible will provide the
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
winch with its greatest pulling power.
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
and through the hook loop, being careful not to over disengaged.
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box, 10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote conlocated behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let
trol switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack
the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If
remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand
you choose to control the winch from inside your
well clear of it and never step over it.
vehicle, always pass the remote through a window to
avoid pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the remote control when not in use.
5
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding can cause damage to the wire rope.
In certain situations you may
decide to throw a heavy blanket or similar object over the
wire rope. A heavy blanket
can absorb energy should the
wire rope break. Place it on
the wire rope midway between the winch and the anchor point. Do this before the
wire rope is put under tension. Do not approach or move the blanket once tension
is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead.
If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the
tension on the wire rope first.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
13. Establish ⴖno peopleⴖ zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely
aware of your intentions before you pull. Declare
where the spectators should not stand - never
behind or in front of the vehicle and never near the
wire rope or snatch block. Your situation may have
other ⴖno peopleⴖ zones.
5
No People Zones
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine
on and light tension already on the wire rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire
rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum. For additional assistance, the winched
vehicle can be slowly driven while being pulled by
the winch. Continue pulling until the vehicle is on
stable ground. If you are able to drive the vehicle, the
winching operation is complete.
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
• Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
winch motor to cool down.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
• What to look for under load: The wire rope must 15. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is comalways spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum
plete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and shift
the transmission to PARK. Release tension in the wire
rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make
rope.
sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw16. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the
ing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the
anchor.
wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock 17. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire
loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire
rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide
through the hand, control the winch at all times.
rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to
stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become
large enough to cause serious damage to the winch. So,
line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or
mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that
section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end
of the drum, which will free up space for continued
winching.
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when
spooled. Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling
drum is wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and
straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the wire rope
under light tension and spool the wire rope back and
onto the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to
tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Repeat this
process until the winch hook is the same distance as the
full length of the remote control from the winch. Pinch
the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach
the hook strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb
and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope. Walk the
wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the
remaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control
switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow 19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote
hook.
control cord from the control box and store in a clean
and dry place. Winching operations are now complete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
Rigging Techniques
Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from too
little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight
line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a straight-line pulling situation. You will have to
assess what technique is correct for your situation. Think
⬙safety⬙ at all times.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
How To Change The Pulling Direction
wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch
block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle
will enable you to change your pulling direction while
still allowing the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly
onto the spooling drum.
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical advantage and that increases your pulling
power.
Change Pulling Directions
All winching operations should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Double Line
wire rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your
vehicle’s frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through
a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the
snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor
point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure
to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker
chain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the
two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
Because pulling power decreases with the number of steering capability if power assist is lost.
layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a
snatch block to double line out more wire rope. This
decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum,
and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
– IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
Parking Brake Release
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
transmission in PARK.
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
The foot operated parking brake is located below the cluster will illuminate.
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release
handle.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This
will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydroboost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches during hard braking maneuvers.
operating temperature.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All of the
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions, and are commonly
referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
WARNING!
• ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped
Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s), and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a
limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual. This brake
pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping
to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward traction.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system
applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency
braking conditions. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying the
brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of BAS, you must apply continuous
braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped
duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short duration, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied.
During operation, HSA will activate the brake control
system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on
the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight
pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is
normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in
launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the • Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline
level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
TRAL.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
7%), with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met, HSA will
activate.
Towing And Hauling With HSA
The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded
or towing a trailer unless the TOW/HAUL switch, located on the center stack, is selected. When activated, the
“TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information. In
order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under
towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver
comfort while launching on a hill, the system recognizes
when the TOW/HAUL switch is activated and compensates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while
throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from
rolling down the hill.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply
more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the
brake pedal. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
or using the parking brake, it will roll down the
incline and could collide with another vehicle,
object or person, and cause serious or fatal injury.
Always remember to use the parking brake while
parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible
for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
HSA Off
Non-EVIC Equipped Vehicles
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
procedure:
1. Start with the engine OFF, and the vehicle in PARK
with the wheels straight.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
2. Start the engine.
EVIC Equipped Vehicles
3. With the engine running and the brake applied, rotate HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC
the steering wheel 180° counterclockwise from center. equipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
4. Press the “ESC Off” switch four times within 20
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should appear
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
and disappear four times.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) – If Equipped
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise (180° clockThe ESC system enhances directional control and stabilwise from center).
ity of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle
7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
HSA is off.
maintain the desired path.
Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds
to turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re-enable ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
HSA functionality.
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro- this mode. This mode should be used for almost all
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial
Off” or “ESC Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
All Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD, 4WD AUTO, Or 4WD
LOCK Modes Can Choose The Following ESC
Operating Modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD/4WD
AUTO/4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if
equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral, back to
4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO, the ESC system will be in
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion
of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ⬙ESC Off
Indicator Light⬙ will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than TCS would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
All Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD AUTO And
4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose The
Following ESC Operating Mode. This Is The Only
ESC Operating Mode in 4WD LOW:
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to
trail conditions. This mode is entered by pressing and
holding the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds when the
vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. After five
seconds, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate
and the “ESC Off” message will appear in the odometer.
Press and release the trip odometer button located on the
instrument cluster to clear this message.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed
into the PARK position from any other position and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared.
In this mode, ESC and TCS except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
40 mph (64 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, described above. When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h) the ESC system shuts off. ESC
is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere
with off-road driving but ESC function returns to provide
the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” will always be illuminated
when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily
press the “ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
“ESC Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
LOW. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or
the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOCK
or NEUTRAL, to 4WD LOW, the ESC system will be in
this mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC ⴖFull Offⴖ mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. “ESC Off” mode is intended for offhighway or off-road use only.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON NOTE:
position. It should go out with the engine
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenLight” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
diagnosed and corrected.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
that caused the ESC activation.
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system
may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
TSC will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
TSC is only active in the default “ESC On” mode. TSC
can be disabled by pressing the “ESC Off” switch and
entering “ESC Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the
“ESC Partial Off” or “ESC Off” modes. Refer to the ESC
portion of this section for an explanation of the different
ESC operating modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
B-Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information
Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Tire And Loading Information Placard
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
the weight referenced here.
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occusafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
capacity calculated in Step 4.
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
manual to determine how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pascargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. Refer to “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look temperature changes.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in the
case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tire inflation pressures.
your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
first opportunity.
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
(Continued)
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
WARNING! (Continued)
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- Tread Wear Indicators
ping when you are stuck.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Emergencies” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
(Continued)
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
Replacement Tires
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manuoriginal equipment vehicle dealer with any questions
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivayou may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
— IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passengers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION! (Continued)
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
(Continued)
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
NOTE:
• On 4x2 and 4x4 1500 model trucks, the use of class “S”
snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of
trucks equipped with P265/70R17 tires.
• On 4x2 2500 model trucks, the use of class “U” snow
chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks
equipped with LT245/70R17 or LT265/70R17 tires.
• On 4x4 2500 model trucks, the use of class “U” snow
chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, or LT285/
70R17 tires.
• On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheel) model
trucks, the use of class “U” snow chains is permitted
on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with
LT265/70R17 tires.
• On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 DRW (Dual Rear Wheel) model
trucks, the use of class “U” snow chains is permitted
on the front and rear wheels of trucks equipped with
LT235/80R17 tires.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of any
model except for 3500 DRW (Dual Rear Wheel)
trucks equipped with LT235/80R17 tires. There may
not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do
not use tire chains on the rear wheels of 1500 model
trucks equipped with LT275/70R17, P275/60R20, or
285/45R22 tires. There may not be adequate clearance
for the chains and you are risking structural or body
damage to your vehicle.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Directional Tires – If Equipped
Dual Rear Wheels – If Equipped
For the R/T package with 22” tires & wheels, tire rotation
must be performed with consideration of the tire rotation
direction. The recommended rotation pattern for directional tires is shown below.
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
5
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the
asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/OffRoad tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL)
tires.
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be
remounted on the rim, or installed at a different
location, to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position
on the truck. For example, if the spare is used to
replace an outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will
maintain proper position.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
the tire.
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
Base System
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each illuminate or the chime to sound.
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors, and
• TPM Telltale Light
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the EVIC, and a
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
the TPM sensors.
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
toring Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” mesmaterials that may block radio wave signals.
sage will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitor- 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
ing Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn ON. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will
also be displayed.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec(24 km/h) will turn off the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message,
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure • TPM Telltale Light
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
Premium System – If Equipped
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each the chime to sound.
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display
a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of
five seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values
of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or
in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
EVIC will stop flashing or return to it’s original color, and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the TPM sensors.
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains Vehicles with Full Size Spare
materials that may block radio wave signals.
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
wheel housings.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
Light” will turn ON. In addition, the EVIC will display
a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message and a graphic
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
showing the low tire pressure value flashing or in a
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
is detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
displayed.
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the pressure value
will be updated and stop flashing or return to it’s
original color, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Tire Light
Load Inflation Switch Description (2500 Models) –
If Equipped
WARNING!
Never operate your vehicle with the TPMS and tire
pressures set to the Light Load Inflation Pressure
settings if carrying more than two occupants (150 lbs
[68 kg] each) plus 200 pounds (91 kg) of cargo. The
vehicle “Light Load Definition” is found in the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label which
is located on the rear face of the driver door opening.
Failure to do so may cause you to lose control
resulting in an accident, causing serious or fatal
injury.
The TPMS tire light load inflation switch will allow the
driver to switch between the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold and the light load
inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning threshold
depending on the vehicle’s load condition. The Tire and
Loading Information label defines the recommended
front and rear cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle
when operating in the Max Load condition. A Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label is also available
defining Light Load tire inflation pressures when operating in the Light Load condition. When the tire light
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
load inflation switch LED is ON, the TPMS is using the Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Operation – If
light load inflation pressure (cold) low inflation warning Equipped
thresholds.
• This vehicle may have different recommended tire
pressure values between the front and rear tires as
shown in both the Tire Loading Information Label and
the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label. It is
also equipped to be driven with tire pressures appropriate to either a Light Load condition or the vehicle
Max Load condition.
• The tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver
to change between the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold and the light
load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning
threshold depending on the vehicle’s load condition.
Refer to the “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information”
label for the vehicle’s Light Load inflation pressures
and “Tire and Loading Information” label for the
vehicle’s Max Load inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Tire Pressure Information label. The Supplemental Tire
Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of
the driver door opening. Use an accurate tire gauge to
check the tire pressures when lowering all four tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven above
15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this updated pressure
information. After all four tire pressures have been
lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures, press the
tire light load inflation switch. If the tire light load
inflation switch’s amber colored LED turns ON, the
TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure (cold) low
pressure warning thresholds. A text message ⬙Tire PresExample Supplemental Tire Pressure Label
sure System - Light Load Setting⬙ will also be displayed
To switch from the max load inflation pressure (cold) low in the EVIC.
pressure warning threshold to the light load inflation
If the tire light load inflation switch amber colored LED
pressure (cold) low pressure warning threshold, begin by
flashes on and off for 10 seconds, after all four tire
placing the ignition switch in the RUN position. Next,
pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation
lower all four road tire pressures to the Light Load
pressures, the pressure in any one of the four tires may
Inflation Pressure values as listed on the Supplemental
not be at the light load inflation pressure (cold) values as
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
indicated for the Light Load condition as defined on the
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on
the rear face of the driver door. A text message ⬙Cannot
Enter Light Load Setting - Please Adjust Tire Pressure⬙
text message will also be displayed in the EVIC. Using an
accurate tire pressure gauge, re-check the tire pressures
for the light load inflation pressure (cold) value.
WARNING!
It is the driver’s responsibility to change to the max
load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning
threshold condition when not driving in the light
load condition as defined as two occupants (150 lbs
[68 kg] each) plus 200 pounds (91 kg) of cargo. The
vehicle “Light Load Definition” is found in the
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on the rear face of the driver door. Failure to do
so may cause you to lose control resulting in an
accident, causing serious or fatal injury.
To switch back to the max load inflation pressure (cold)
low pressure warning threshold, press the tire light load
inflation switch. It is not necessary to first fill the tires to
the max load inflation pressure (cold) values to switch
the TPMS system to the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold. If after pressing
the tire light load inflation switch, and tire pressures are
below the max load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure
warning thresholds, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will turn
ON and a chime will sound. An ⬙inflate to XX⬙ message
will also be displayed. The tire pressures are now required to be inflated to the max load inflation pressure
(cold) values described on the Tire and Loading Information label. The Tire and Loading Information label is
located on the drivers side B-pillar. If the tire light load
inflation switch LED turns OFF, the TPMS has been reset
and the TPMS is using the max load inflation pressure
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
(cold) low pressure warning thresholds. A text message FUEL REQUIREMENTS
⬙Tire Pressure System - Maximum Load Setting⬙ will also
3.6L And 4.7L Engine
be displayed in the EVIC.
General Information
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will
• This device must accept any interference received, not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
including interference that may cause undesired op- engines.
eration.
5.7L Engine
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
United States
MRXC4W4MA4
fuel economy and performance when usCanada
2546A-C4W4MA4
ing high quality unleaded gasoline having
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Reformulated Gasoline
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s world wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to prove air quality.
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasohigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will prorequired. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- fuel system components.
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
before considering service for the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
CAUTION!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E-85 E-85 perform the following:
ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol, it • drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
does not have the negative effects of methanol.
• change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• operate in a lean mode
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage Fuel System Cautions
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
CAUTION!
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content performance:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfortherefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
mance and damage the emissions control system.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
and California reformulated gasoline.
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Materials Added To Fuel
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
or malfunctioning and may require immediate sercontain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
assistance.
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
(Continued)
fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
(Continued)
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L/4.7L ENGINES ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
E-85 Badge
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and avoided.
15% unleaded gasoline.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
a period of at least 5 minutes
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
during warm up.
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
NOTE:
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
• When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C), recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
you may experience hard starting and rough idle the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
following start up even if the above recommendations contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
are followed.
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol comincrease in the time it takes for your engine to start, and patible parts.
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel
CAUTION!
door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counterclockwise.
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
ADDING FUEL
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
NOTE:
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
the vehicle is started.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle components sometimes specified by purchasers for inincluding driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe label also specifies maximum capacities of front and cle’s GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Loading
Tire Size
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerInflation Pressure
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. WeighCurb Weight
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
Rim Size
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed TRAILER TOWING
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
the brakes operate.
and safely as possible.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
further information.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or teminformation.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
WARNING!
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
supported by the scale.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Tongue Weight (TW)
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
Trailer Sway Control
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumThe trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping sized trailers.
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and Weight-Distributing Hitch
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fricA weight-distributing system works by applying levertion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
Frontal Area
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
5
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in an accident.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of WeightDistributing Hitch (Incorrect)
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
trailer with a coupling king pin.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type
Max. Trailer Hitch Max.
Trailer Weight
Class III Bumper
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Hitch - 1500 Model
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Class IV - 1500
11,000 lbs (4989 kg)
Model
Class V - 2500/3500
17,000 lbs (7711 kg)
Models
Fifth Wheel - 2500/
25,000 lbs (11339 kg)
3500 Models
Gooseneck - 2500
20,000 lbs (9071 kg)
Model
Gooseneck - 3500
35,000 lbs (15875 kg)
Model
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to a 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) without added equipment or alterations to
the standard equipment.
Ram 1500 4x2
3.6L V-6
8–Speed
Automatic
Transmission
4.7L V-8
6–Speed
Automatic
Transmission
ST
Standard Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 6,500 lbs
(2 948 kg)
Max Payload: 1,910 lbs (866 kg)
Standard Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 7,700 lbs
(3 492 kg)
Max Payload: 1,750 lbs (793 kg)
SLT/Outdoorsman
Standard Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 6,500 lbs
(2 948 kg)
Max Payload: 1,890 lbs (857 kg)
Standard Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 7,700 lbs
(3 492 kg)
Max Payload: 1,720 lbs (780 kg)
Sport/Laramie
–
–
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
5.7L HEMI®
V-8 6–Speed
Automatic
Transmission
ST
Standard Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 10,450 lbs
(4 740 kg)
Max Payload: 1,710 lbs (775 kg)
SLT/Outdoorsman
Standard Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 10,450 lbs
(4 740 kg)
Max Payload: 1,690 lbs (766 kg)
Sport/Laramie
Standard Towing:
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 10,300 lbs
(4 672 kg)
Max Payload: 1,550 lbs
(703 kg)
ST
Standard Towing:
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 6,300 lbs
(2 857 kg)
Max Payload: 1,930 lbs (875 kg)
SLT/Outdoorsman
Standard Towing:
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 6,250 lbs
(2 834 kg)
Max Payload: 1,900 lbs (861 kg)
Sport/Laramie
–
Ram 1500 4x4
3.6L V-6
8–Speed
Automatic
Transmission
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
4.7L V-8
6–Speed
Automatic
Transmission
5.7L HEMI®
V-8 6–Speed
Automatic
Transmission
ST
Standard Towing:
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 7,500 lbs
(3 401 kg)
Max Payload: 1,570 lbs (712 kg)
Standard Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 10,350 lbs
(4 694 kg)
Max Payload: 1,480 lbs (671 kg)
SLT/Outdoorsman
Standard Towing:
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 7,450 lbs
(3 379 kg)
Max Payload: 1,530 lbs (694 kg)
Standard Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 10,300 lbs
(4 672 kg)
Max Payload: 1,450 lbs (657 kg)
Sport/Laramie
–
Standard Towing:
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Max Towing: 10,050 lbs
(4 558 kg)
Max Payload: 1,380 lbs
(625 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
Ram 2500 And 3500
5.7L HEMI®
V-8 6–Speed
Automatic
Transmission
ST
Max Towing: 10,100 lbs
(4 581 kg)
Max Payload: 1,780 lbs (807 kg)
SLT/Outdoorsman/Sport
Max Towing: 12,300 lbs
(5 579 kg)
Max Payload: 3,120 lbs
(1 415 kg)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• http://www.ramtrucks.com
• http://www.ramtruck.ca (Canada)
Laramie
–
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed
the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer
hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
Towing Requirements – Tires
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized .
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (750 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
WARNING! (Continued)
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic
(EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified 1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydrau- 3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
lic systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be
compatible with ITBM.
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to
activate power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control
lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
the trailer brakes.
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
applied.
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
GAIN
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status. The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditurned on, pressing the GAIN adjustment button or
tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
Adjusting GAIN
4. Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “VEHICLE SETTINGS” appears on the screen.
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph 5. Press the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
(30–40 km/h).
“VEHICLE SETTINGS”.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working 6. Press the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake
condition, functioning normally, and properly adType appears on the screen.
justed. See your trailer dealer if necessary.
NOTE:1500 Models Only– Light Electric and Heavy
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec- Electric will only be available due to the tow capacities of
tions according to the trailer manufacturer’s instruc- the vehicle.
tions.
7. Press the RIGHT arrow and then press the UP or
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type
appears on the screen.
in, the trailer connected message should appear in the
EVIC (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM,
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
braking functions will not be available), the GAIN
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h)
setting will illuminate and the correct type of trailer
and squeeze the manual brake control lever commust be selected from the EVIC options.
pletely.
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
Type of Trailer
Brakes
Light Electric
Electric Trailer
Brakes
Heavy Electric
Electric Trailer
Brakes
Load
*Under 10,000 lbs
*Above 10,000 lbs
* The suggested selection depends and may change
depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and
road state may also affect the selection.
EVIC Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Display messages,
Light EOH
Electric over Hydraulic Trailer
Brakes
*Under 10,000 lbs
Heavy EOH
Electric over Hydraulic Trailer
Brakes
*Above 10,000 lbs
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer connection,
trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result
in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result
in personal injury.
NOTE:
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use
with trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on
your trailer and the availability of controllers, check
with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and electronic
modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if
an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy
to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shiftingdoes occur while in DRIVE, select
“TOW/HAUL” mode or select a lower gear using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) switches.
NOTE: Using “TOW/HAUL” mode or a lower gear
range while operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build
up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
vehicle in first gear (using the ERS switches) can help to
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
avoid transmission overheating.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of
you can get back to cruising speed.
continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) as specified for ⬙police, taxi, • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.⬙. Refer to “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Cooling System
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level To reduce potential for engine and transmission overbefore towing (6-speed automatic only).
heating, take the following actions:
Tow/Haul Mode
City Driving
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheatWhen stopped for short periods of time, shift the transing, turn the “TOW/HAUL” feature ON when driving in
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) switches) on more severe Highway Driving
grades.
Reduce speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle,
the air suspension system can be used. Refer to “Air
Suspension System” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of
the air suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in
the front end structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
5
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
(Continued)
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual.
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual.
2500/3500 Models Only
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterecommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow rior lamps are not properly installed.
the recommendations contained within the current Body Before Plowing
Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or
snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are • Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
unique electrical systems that must be connected to
properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading • Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
vehicle systems.
tightness.
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear. The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow system,
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 in (6 cm to 1.2 all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, options, and
cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings. These
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and funcweights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certificationing properly.
tion Label on the driver’s side door opening.
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pasFor Information about snowplow applications visit sengers.
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body BuildVehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specificaers Guide.
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset
should not exceed two.
if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
GAWR should never be exceeded.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of parked.
options or passengers, etc.
5
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip- General Maintenance
ment following the recommendations provided by the Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
plow manufacturer’s instructions.
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
Attached
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
damage, the following precautions should be observed.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface • Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or
congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4H.
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
Operating Tips
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator • Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
the transmission.
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
The Ground
NONE
Dolly Tow
Front
On Trailer
Rear
ALL
Two-Wheel
Drive Models
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
OK
OK
Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in PARK
• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be
lowered to the “Entry/Exit” (lowest) level, and have
automatic leveling disabled, before tying them down
(from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Air
Suspension – If Equipped” for more information. If the
vehicle cannot be lowered to the “Entry/Exit” level (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow
these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or
cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in
NEUTRAL).
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
CAUTION!
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may
leak from the transmission, causing damage to
internal parts.
Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted
into PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions
must be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
(Continued)
5
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not
in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid
will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to
internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
(Continued)
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running. Firmly apply the parking brake.
4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
5.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer
case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
• With electronic shift transfer case, press and hold the
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models
have a small, recessed ⬙N⬙ button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be pressed using a
ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a
rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary
transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will blink while the shift is in progress.
The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the
shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is
completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
6. Release the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual 13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
tow bar.
no vehicle movement.
14. Release the parking brake.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
• Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met
10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
the parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, press and hold the ENIf any of these requirements are not met prior to
GINE START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). On 8-speed
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
transmissions the shifter will automatically select
PARK when the engine is turned off.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
12. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
cycle the key or the Keyless Enter-N-Go button to the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
RUN position and back to the OFF position. Remove
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
the key fob from the ignition switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer
case lever to the desired position.
• With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector
switch, press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the
NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer
case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
• With electronic shift transfer case with pushbutton
selector switch, press and hold the switch for the
desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL
(N) indicator light turns off and the desired position
indicator light turns on.
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL
(N), turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be
helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic
transmission, the engine must remain running, since
turning the engine OFF will shift the transmission to
PARK (and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for
the transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).
5
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will auto• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met prior
matically select PARK when the engine is turned off.
to pressing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N),
6. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual
and must continue to be met until the shift has been
transmission).
completed. If any of these requirements are not met
before pressing the button or are no longer met during
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
8. Start the engine.
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
button is released.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
10. Release the parking brake.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series) . .587
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped . . . .589
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 1500 SERIES
TRUCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Jack Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 2500 AND
3500 SERIES TRUCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Removal Of Jack And Tools (1500 Series) . . . . .573
▫ Jack Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Removal Of Jack And Tools
(2500, 3500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Jack Instructions (1500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
▫ Jack Instructions (2500, 3500 Series) . . . . . . . . .597 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .618
▫ Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (2500 And
3500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped . . . .608
▫ Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
䡵 HOISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
▫ Column Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Center Console Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . .620
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION (3.6L Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . .612 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
upper switch bank just below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
may wear down your battery.
6
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 1500 SERIES
TRUCKS
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
NOTE: To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the
plastic access cover, located on the side of the front
passengers seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part
of the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you
to release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is
loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it
is free from the seat frame.
6
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Access Cover
Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide tools from bag.
the assembly out from under the seat.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
6
Jack And Tool Bag
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise
until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension
tube with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper
and into the winch mechanism tube.
Removing The Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
6
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other 4. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING! (Continued)
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jack Instructions (1500 Series)
WARNING!
6
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing out.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Placement of the jack:
4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
Jack Warning Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
6
4X2 Front Jacking Location Indicator
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack
under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown
below.
4X2 Front Jacking Location
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
4X4 Front Jacking Location
4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension may be used but is not
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack required.
under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel,
below.
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
4X4 Front Jacking Location Indicator
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts
and adjust the jack position as required.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause a collision. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
Rear Jacking Location
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
6
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped
end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. To avoid the
risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been
lowered.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
6. Using the lug wrench, finish tightening the wheel nuts 7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
using a crisscross pattern. The correct wheel nut
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel
tightness for a cone type wheel nut is 120–140 ft lbs
center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap
(160–190 N·m) torque, for a flanged type wheel nut is
damage.
130–160 ft lbs (175–215 N·m) torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque 8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel)
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube
station.
in order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack,
and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do 1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot be stored under the vehicle because the wheel
retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure
the flat tire in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
6
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to 3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.
properly across the wheel opening.
Insert the tube through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot
be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to
ensure it is firmly in place.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
6
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug
wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Jack And Tools Tied
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor.
Jack And Tool Bag
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
6
Jack Hold Down Fastener
Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
NOTE: Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold
down location.
WARNING!
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
Reinstall the plastic cover.
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
(Continued)
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
back-and-forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug
nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle Wheel Nuts
off the ground.
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
CAUTION!
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the hub cap. especially important during the first few hundred miles/
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to
become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly
cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the
bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torques are shown in the following chart.
Type
Nut
Stud
Size
Hex Size
Torque
Ft Lbs
Cone
Flanged
M14 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5
22 mm
22 mm
120-140
130-160
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 2500 AND 3500
SERIES TRUCKS
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Torque
Newton
Meters
160-190
175-215
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
to release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is
loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it
is free from the seat frame.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools (2500, 3500 Series)
To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the
Jack Access Cover
plastic access cover, located on the side of the front Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
passengers seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide
of the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you the assembly out from under the seat.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
6
Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly.
Turn the jack-turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack
from bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
(Continued)
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension
tube with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper
and into the winch mechanism tube.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise 3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
access to the spare tire retainer.
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
6
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
6
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Instructions (2500, 3500 Series)
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing out.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
3. Placement of the jack:
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
6
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
For 2500 and 3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a
front wheel, place the bottle jack under the frame rail
behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as
possible on the straight part of the frame.
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension, may be used, but is not
required.
4x2 Front Jacking Location
4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
For 2500 and 3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the
front wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and
connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601
jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the jack tube axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.
extension and wheel wrench.
6
4x4 Front Jacking Location
4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location
For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel,
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
Rear Jacking Location (All)
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. On
single rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel
and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
nuts toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts
models (DRW) the wheel nuts are a two-piece assemand adjust the jack position as required.
bly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts. To
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use
fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been
the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
lowered.
CAUTION!
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the 6. Using the lug wrench, finish tightening the wheel nuts
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
using a crisscross pattern. The correct wheel nut
tightness for a cone type wheel nut is 120–140 ft lbs
WARNING!
(160–190 N·m) torque, for a flanged type wheel nut is
130–160 ft lbs (175–215 N·m) torque. If in doubt about
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
the vehicle unstable and cause a collision. It could
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
station.
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel ately.
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel
WARNING!
center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap
damage.
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel)
by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube
in order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack,
and tools as previously described.
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
6
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube
with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.
Insert the tube through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
6
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot
be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to
ensure it is firmly in place.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (2500 And 3500
Series)
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly.
Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips.
Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn the
jack-turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into
bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip
the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot
engages into the fastener on the floor.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
6
Jack Hold Down Fastener
Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
NOTE: Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
slides into the front hold down location.
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan. off the ground.
Reinstall the plastic cover.
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front and
rear center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap
and/or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A
pulling motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to remove the caps.
For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the blade on the
end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off. Insert the
blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the
hub cap with a back and forth motion.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
CAUTION!
• Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the
hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
pry off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609
nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel
are firmly seated around the wheel.
nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the
Wheel Nuts
bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi- nut just previously tightened until final torque is
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the achieved. Recommended torques are shown in the folbolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is lowing chart.
especially important during the first few hundred miles/
kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to
Type
Nut
Stud
Size
Hex Size
Torque
Ft Lbs
Cone
Flanged
M14 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5
22 mm
22 mm
120-140
130-160
Torque
Newton
Meters
160-190
175-215
6
610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels
Dual wheels are flat-mounted and center-piloted. The lug
nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two
drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the
washer.
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assembling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening, to ensure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to correctly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear
wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two
individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front
location. The correct direction of rotation for dual tire
installations must also be observed.
Oiling Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles
(160 km) and after 500 miles (800 km).
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts of the underbody.
Tightening Pattern
1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
snug fit.
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
6
612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
precautions.
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613
WARNING!
Positive Battery Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster spected at your authorized dealer.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
CAUTION!
battery.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
the reverse sequence:
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the plugged in long enough without engine operation,
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
battery.
starting.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the transmission overheating and failure. Allow the enfront wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear least one minute after every five rocking-motion
and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accel- the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the enNOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
gine.
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
transmission, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph or less.
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the
following procedures to temporarily move the shift lever:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619
Column Shifter — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the
override tab into the access port (ringed circle) on the
bottom of the steering column. Push and hold the
override release lever up.
6
Shift Lever Override Access Port
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Center Console Shifter — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover which is located on
the right side of the shift lever.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the
override tab through the access port on the center
console.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION (3.6L Engine)
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
Manual Park Release Pull Strap
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
the parking brake release handle, below and to the left
of the steering column.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
Manual Park Release lever locking tab (just below the
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its
middle of the lever) to the right.
original position, until the locking tab snaps into place
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
to secure the lever.
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever
rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards the 3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever
driver’s seat. Release the locking tab and verify that
is locked in its stowed position.
the Manual Park Release lever is locked in the released
4. Re-install the access cover.
position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled lowered to the Park (lowest) level, and have automatic
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the trans- leveling disabled, before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to ⬙Air Suspenmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational sion⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙ for more information. If
the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level (for
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow
these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or
cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
6
624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift
or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
NONE
2WD Models
4WD Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
(6–speed transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
(8–speed transmission)
Front
Rear
OK
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Auto Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT
NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
ALL
BEST METHOD
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmiswhile being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
discharged, see ”Manual Park Release” or “Shift Lever
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK • The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)
for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
for towing.
8-speed transmission.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles
(48 km) for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised
and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a
suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels
6
626 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
in the straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear
the front wheels on the ground.
(NOT in Neutral, for manual transmissions). Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
CAUTION!
detailed instructions.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. DamCAUTION!
age from improper towing is not covered under the
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
Four-Wheel Drive Models
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above reOFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towthe opposite end on a towing dolly.
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
Warranty.
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .633
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .633
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Front Driveshaft Lubrication – 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive) Models (Ram Trucks
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .636
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER . . . . . . . . .669
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
▫ Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park
And Turn – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
▫ Fog Lamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps – If Equipped . . . .686
▫ Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Battery
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (2500/3500 Models Only)
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
soon as possible.
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
do the following:
PROGRAMS
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
crank or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
this test over.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
of a normal bulb check.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was turer’s warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intermanufacturer only recommends
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
NOTE: For 2500/3500 trucks with a 5.7L engine operating under a gross combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs (6
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
350 kg) or greater, SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
for all operating temperatures.
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for Synthetic Engine Oils
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomlocation, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomYour Vehicle” for further information.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use are followed.
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Operating” for further information.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- station or governmental agency for advice on how and
ber should not be used.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Viscosity
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
Front Driveshaft Lubrication – 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive) Models (Ram Trucks Only)
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR® Type MS6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Adding Washer Fluid
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help Exhaust System
blade performance.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
system.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
WARNING!
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exCommercially available windshield washer solvents
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damare flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
the washer solution.
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Cooling System
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator drain cock is located in the lower radiator
tank. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
(antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant expanmonths (before the onset of freezing weather, where
sion bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESapplicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
radiator core.
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking , tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the maintenance intervals.
entire system for leaks.
Selection Of Coolant
Engine Coolant Checks
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be flushed with
OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
Material Standard MS-12106.
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- Cooling System Pressure Cap
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen- The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- expansion bottle.
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
WARNING!
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by anicooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To any ground spills immediately.
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Checking Coolant Level
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the MIN and MAX range on
the dipstick.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing enneck.
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
a month.
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
expansion bottle must also be protected against
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
freezing.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MSmally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protechumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaportion of your engine which contains aluminum
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Points To Remember
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake when performing under the hood service or immediately
system components should be inspected periodically. if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper failure.
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. This inspection should be made with the vehicle in
a level position.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with
the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge
of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear
axle.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be
1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on Limited-Slip Differentials
the 9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on
1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip
10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be 1/4
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR® Limited
in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
Slip Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to
Drain And Refill
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Your Vehicle” for further information. The MOPAR®
Limited Slip Additive should be added to the gear
maintenance intervals.
lubricant whenever a fluid change is made to an axle
Lubricant Selection
equipped with a Limited Slip Differential.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in 2500/3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ- Automatic Transmission
ential, the Limited Slip Additive should be added before
Selection Of Lubricant
the gear lubricant is added to insure proper additive fill.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Transfer Case
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
Drain And Refill
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is
maintenance intervals.
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
Lubricant Selection
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will require more frequent
fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check - Six-Speed Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C).
This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can
read the transmission sump temperature in the EVIC
display (see Electronic Vehicle Information Center [EVIC]
for further information).
7
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use the following procedure to check the transmission 7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
fluid level properly:
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the EVIC
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
display, and operate the vehicle as required to reach
if the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
the normal operating temperature.
should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes
on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of
ONLY the recommended fluid (see ⬙Fluids, Lubrithis procedure.
cants, and Genuine Parts⬙ for fluid specifications).
4. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick
tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to
pedal.
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
5. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posifluid level.
tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the lever in PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD
region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting
the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid
change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as required,
once the transmission reaches normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until
the temperature is elevated enough to produce an
accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to
warm the fluid.
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter(s) if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
7
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
and Tar Remover to remove.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
The most common causes are:
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
7
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
Cleaning Headlights
leather upholstery.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt stone breakage than glass headlights.
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folgents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather lowed by rinsing.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
required to maintain the original condition.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
rag.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Seat Belt Maintenance
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
scratch the elements.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
directly on the mirror.
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care buckles do not work properly.
Glass Surfaces
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau
cover, use MOPAR® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and 1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
MOPAR® Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
loose dirt and debris.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft
cloth or brush.
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty 3. Rinse bedliner with water.
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV
exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss 4. Once dry, apply a small amount of MOPAR®
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or
over time.
sponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On
bedliner.
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically
rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your
WARNING!
truck at least twice per year using the MOPAR®
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become
authorized dealer.
slippery and may result in personal injury.
7
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many
different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil,
hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill
occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as
soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.
FUSES
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the the following chart.
floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point is exposed under
the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While
not covered by your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix
to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required. To
repair a tear or gouge, follow the directions provided in
the MOPAR® Quick Repair Kit.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
Cavity
F01
F03
F05
Power Distribution Center Location
Cartridge
Fuse
80 Amp
Red
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
F06
40 Amp
Green
F07
40 Amp
Green
Micro
Fuse
Description
Rad Fan Control
Module – If
equipped
Rad Fan – If
Equipped
Compressor for Air
Suspension – If
Equipped
Antilock Brakes/
Electronic Stability
Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
7
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F08
F09
F10
F10
F11
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Emissions Diesel –
If Equipped
Diesel Fuel Heater
– If Equipped
Body Controller /
Exterior Lighting #2
Body Controller /
Exterior Lighting #2
– If Equipped with
Stop/Start
Integrated Trailer
Brake Module – If
Equipped
F12
F13
F14
F15
F19
F20
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Body Controller #3
/ Interior Lights
Blower Motor
Body Controller #4
/ Power Locks
Electric Park Brake
Right Side – If
Equipped
SCR – If Equipped
Passenger Door
Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
Cavity
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F25
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Drive Train Control
Module
Engine Control
Module
Body Controller #1
F26
F28
20 Amp
Yellow
Driver Door Module
Front Wiper Low
Speed
Front Wiper High
Speed
F29
20 Amp
Yellow
F30
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
F32
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup
Lights – If
Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking
Lights – If
Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle
Drive Train Control
Module – If
Equipped
7
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F33
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
F34
30 Amp
Pink
F35
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
F36
F37
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Diesel Fuel Heater
#1 – If Equipped /
Rear Blower – If
Equipped
Vehicle System Interface Module #2 –
If Equipped
Sunroof – If
Equipped
Rear Defroster– If
Equipped
Diesel Fuel Heater
#2 if equipped
F38
F39
F41
F42
F43
F44
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Power Inverter
115V AC– If
Equipped
Vehicle System Interface Module #1–
If Equipped
Active Grill Shutter
Horn
Snow Plow (Left) –
If Equipped
Diagnostic Port
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
Cavity
F46
F47
F49
F50
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Tire Pressure Monitor
Snow Plow (Right)
– If Equipped
Instrument Panel
Cluster
Air Suspension
Control Module – If
Equipped
Ignition Node
Module / Keyless
Ignition
Battery Sensor
F53
F51
10 Amp
Red
F52
5 Amp
Tan
F54
F55
F56
F57
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
Trailer Tow – Left
Turn/Stop Lights
Adjustable Pedals
20 Amp
Yellow
E38 Radio – If
Equipped
Additional Diesel
Content – If
Equipped
Transmission
7
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F58
F60
F61
F62
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
20 Amp
Yellow
(Gas Engine) /
25 Amp
Natural
(Diesel
Engine)
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Engine Cooling
Pump
F63
F64
F65
F66
Underhood Lamp
Power Take-off
Unit – If Equipped
Air Conditioning
Clutch
F67
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
IgnitionCoils (Gas),
Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors /
Powertrain
USB interface
10 Amp
Red
Sunroof / Passenger Window
Switches / Rain
Sensor
CD / DVD /
Bluetooth Handsfree Module – If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
Cavity
F69
F70
F71
F72
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
15 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Green
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
Mod SCR 12V – If
Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
F74
Amplifier
Voltage Stabilizer
Modules – If
Equipped
F75
F76
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
(Gas
Engine)
/ 10
Amp
Red
(Diesel
Engine)
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Brake Vacuum
Pump Gas/Diesel –
If Equipped
Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
Antilock Brakes/
Electronic Stability
Control
7
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
F77
10 Amp
Red
F78
10 Amp
Red
F79
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
Drivetrain Control
Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
Engine Control
Module / Electric
Power Steering
Clearance Lights
F80
F81
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
Micro
Fuse
Description
F82
10 Amp
Red
F84
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Steering Column
Control Module/
Cruise Control
Switch Bank/
Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
F85
F86
Universal Garage
Door Opener /
Compass
Trailer Tow Right
Turn/Stop Lights
F87
Cartridge
Fuse
Airbag Module
Air Suspension /
Trailer Tow / Steering Column Control Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
Cavity
F88
F90/F91
F93
F94
F95
F96
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
Instrument Panel
Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear
seats) Customer
Selectable
Cigar Lighter
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Micro
Fuse
Description
F97
25 Amp
Natural
F98
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Rear Heated Seats
& Heated Steering
Wheel – If
Equipped
Front Heated Seats
– If Equipped
Climate Control
F99
Shifter / Transfer
Case Module
Rear Camera /
Park Assist
Rear Seat Heater
Switch
F101
F104
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
Electrochromatic
Mirror / Smart
High Beams – If
Equipped
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/
Center Console)
7
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
TS 212–9
Overhead Console
Lamps
Dome Lamp
7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad Headlamp –
Low Beam
Base Quad Headlamp –
High Beam
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Base Quad Headlamp)
Premium Bi Halogen
Projector Headlamp Low Beam
Premium Bi Halogen
Projector Headlamp High Beam
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Premium Headlamp)
Bulb Number
H11
9005
3157NA
HIR2
9005
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal
shape)
Fog Lamp (Vertical
shape)
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear Cargo Lamp
Cab Roof Marker Lamps
Base Rear Tail/Turn and
Stop Lamp
Premium Rear Tail/Turn
and Stop Lamp
Premium Backup Lamp
Rear Lamp Bar ID
Marker Lamp
Bulb Number
9145
9006
921
921
194NA
3157K
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
T20
194
7
680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Marker Lamps
(Dual Rear Wheels)
Backup Lamp
Rear License Plate Lamp
Bulb Number
194
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.
921
194
BULB REPLACEMENT
Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And
Turn – If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the four plastic push-in fasteners that secure
the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both
fender ledges.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash
shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house
splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough
to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the
front lamp unit housing.
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to
disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
7
682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
socket, or the lamp wiring.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb
access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
bulb has been replaced.
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
Fog Lamps – If Equipped
sheetmetal.
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access
the back of the front fog lamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far 3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard
bulb socket.
side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
post retainers in the outer box side panel.
unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
7
684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body as shown.
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring harness to the body.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685
3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
7
686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
Cab Top Clearance Lamps – If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
2. Rotate the socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lamp
assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If 2. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access 3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
to the bulb sockets.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
7
688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise and remove
from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models
2500/3500 Longbed Models
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-30, API Certified).
For 2500/3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight
rating greater than 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).
Metric
26
32
34
35
Gallons
Gallons
Gallons
Gallons
98 Liters
121 Liters
129 Liters
132 Liters
6
6
7
7
Quarts
Quarts
Quarts
Quarts
5.6
5.6
6.6
6.6
Liters
Liters
Liters
Liters
7
690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.)
4.7L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.)
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.)
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use
MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.)
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models w/Heavy Duty (We recommend
you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.)
U.S.
Metric
14 Quarts
13 Liters
14 Quarts
13 Liters
16 Quarts
15 Liters
18.7 Quarts
17.7 Liters
19.2 Quarts
18.2 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine For 2500/3500 trucks operating
under a gross combined weight rating greater than
14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.)
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
We recommend you use MOPAR® brand Engine Oil
Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap
0.043 in [1.1 mm])
7
692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Spark Plugs – 4.7L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L and 4.7L Engines
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. Upper Bank — (Gap 0.040 in [1 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Lower Bank — (Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap
0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission — Eight-Speed Automatic
Automatic Transmission — Six-Speed Automatic with
Gasoline Engine (For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supplement)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693
Component
Transfer Case
Transfer Case – BW44–44 Only
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive Models
Rear Axle – 1500 Models
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir– 2500/3500 Models
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® BW44–44 Transfer
Case Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR®
Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
We recommend you use Synthetic, GL-5 SAE, 75W-90.
Limited-Slip 10.5/11.5 inch Rear Axles Limited slip
additive is not required.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
696 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle InforYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
mation Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Underindicator system. The oil change indicator system will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
whichever comes first.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
• Check engine oil level
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is • Check windshield washer fluid level
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
wear or damage
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering (2500/3500 Models
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
Only) and transmission as needed
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than • Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 697 M
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
• Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4)
models only).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level.
If using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
2
32,000
M 698 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
Mileage or time passed
E
(whichever comes first)
N
A
N
Or Years:
C
E
Or Kilometers:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L engine).**
Replace the top row (intake side)
of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).**
Replace the side row (exhaust
side) of spark plugs
(4.7L Engine).**
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 699 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace spark plugs
(5.7L engine).**
Replace the ignition cables
(4.7L Engine).
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s), if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 700 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
Inspect the transfer case fluid,
change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 701 M
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 702 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .705
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .708
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .705 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .709
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .706
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .706
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .710
9
704 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 705
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
706 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (866) 726–4636
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 707
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
708 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 709
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
710 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 711
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
9
712 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repremance.
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
714 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .640
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .21
Anti-Theft System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .325
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
INDEX 715
.658 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . .
.658
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . .
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . .
.364
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . .
.659
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.656
.656
Warning Light . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock .
Back-Up Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .30 Cab Top Clearance Lights . . .
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . .
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Additives . . . . . . .
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.469
.470
.654
.654
.467
.259
.354
.678
.124
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.686
.193
.245
.689
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
10
716 INDEX
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .257
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.194
.707
.650
.647
.649
.689
.648
.651
.648
.651
.653
.650
.650
.648
.661
.214
.705
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
INDEX 717
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Driving
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case. . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.526
.208
.225
.390
.470
.470
.471
.471
.361
.180
.475
.193
.467
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.616
.571
.612
.618
.634
10
718 INDEX
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . .
Flat Tire Stowage . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements .
Maintenance . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.529
.528
.526
.529
.529
INDEX 719
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.528
.345
.692
.689
.124
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.654
.691
.166
.227
.571
.386
.616
.656
.521
.530
.524
.522
.522
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . .
Requirements . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.531
.521
.524
.522
.521
.521
.689
.526
.530
.668
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . .
Gauges
Speedometer . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.531
.522
.521
.522
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
10
720 INDEX
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Grocery Bag Retainer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.442
.571
.680
.162
.665
.172
.172
.172
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub Caps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.162
.154
.137
.315
.351
.172
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.539
.611
.160
.590
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
INDEX 721
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Key-In Reminder . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go .
Keyless Entry System
Key, Programming . .
Key, Replacement . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.18
.39
.23
.20
.19
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
10
722 INDEX
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . .257
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .480
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .257
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
INDEX 723
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .634
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710 Navigation System (Uconnect® gps) . . . . . . . . . . . .193
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
10
724 INDEX
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Pickup Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .489
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .208
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
INDEX 725
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Ramp Travel Index . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails . . . . . .
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.496
.648
.314
.175
.422
.656
.243
.184
.151
.225
Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .564
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .567
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .312
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
10
726 INDEX
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .59
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
INDEX 727
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral
(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral
(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Sliding Rear Window
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .312
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
10
728 INDEX
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . .503
Suspension, Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.257
.245
.325
.176
.343
.488
.482
.124
.501
.493
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.504
.498
.507
.493
.496
.494
.501
.488
.508
.262
.711
.496
.502
.506
.482
.483
.497
.500
.500
INDEX 729
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . .
Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . .
Torque Converter Clutch . . . .
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.482
.544
.667
.667
.375
.618
.534
.623
.540
.561
.540
.441
.471
.481
.534
.556
.539
.545
.139
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .30
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
10
730 INDEX
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Wheel Nut Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .257
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .708 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2013 RAM TRUCK 1500/2500/3500
Chrysler Group LLC
13D241-126-AF
Sixth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
RAM TRUCK
1500/2500/3500
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement